LiteWare ®

Design Tool
for

Lighting Control Systems

Design Manual
Software Version 3.62
Manual Version: 3.2

3400 South West Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84115
Phone: 801-486-8500
Technical Hot Line: 1-800-527-5527
Fax: 801-486-8569

LIT-532.02
LiteWare 3.62 Design Manual
Copyright © 2006 LiteTouch, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, in any form or by any
means without prior written permission from LiteTouch, Inc.

LiteTouch and LiteWare are registered trademarks of LiteTouch, Inc.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP and their respective logos are registered trademarks of Micro-
soft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
All other brand and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

License Agreement
The customer does not receive title to the software. The customer is granted a nonexclusive license to use the software subject to
the terms of this license agreement.

This software may not be rented or leased. The customer may not remove or alter any proprietary notices, labels, or marks on the
software or accompanying documentation. The customer may not modify, translate, reverse engineer, disassemble, or decompile
the software or accompanying documentation.

LiteTouch, Inc. warrants that for 90 days after the purchase of the software package by the customer, the software shall reason-
ably conform to the standards defined in the accompanying documentation. LiteTouch, Inc. does not warrant that the software
shall be error-free. The customer's sole and exclusive remedy for a failure of the software to perform in accordance with the doc-
umentation shall be the return of the software within 90 days and LiteTouch will replace the software.

LiteTouch reserves the right to provide the customer with updates to the software and retains the right to offer such updates for a
fee. The customer may refuse to accept the updates.

This document may not, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium
or machine-readable form without prior consent in writing from LiteTouch, Inc.

Disclaimer
LiteTouch makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents of this publication and specifically disclaims any
implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Further, LiteTouch reserves the right to revise this
publication without notice.

Pricing Disclaimer
All prices shown in LiteWare 3.62 are list prices. Prices are subject to change without notice. Please contact your LiteTouch rep-
resentative to obtain current pricing. If you do not know your local LiteTouch representative, please call LiteTouch at
801-486-8500.

Manual Updated: May 25, 2006

 What’s New
This section lists notable changes from LiteWare version 3.60 to version
3.62. If you have been using LiteWare version 3.60, you should review this
section.

Refer to LiteWare 3.62.xx Version Information.doc on the LiteWare 3.62

CD and on the LiteTouch Web site (www.litetouch.com) for a complete list
of changes and bug fixes in version 3.62.

Station/Keypad Terminology A transition is in progress to change the terms control station and station to
“keypad.” Until the transition is complete, you will find both terms used in
both the application and this manual. They may be used interchangeably.

Data Input, Daylight Options have been added in the Station Properties dialog box to select data
Harvester Keypads input and Daylight Harvester type keypads. Refer to “Station Tab” on
page 100. (Data inputs have been removed from the “Keypad Type” drop-
down list.)

Default button labels have been added for data input and Daylight Har-
vester keypads.

A light sensor line item has been added in the Billing view when a Day-
light Harvester keypad is added (extra charge).

Data input part numbers have been added to the system.

Mouse Scroll Wheel Support You can now use your mouse scroll wheel in the Station, Enclosure, and
Timer views.

Arc Fault Manual Assignment To minimize the number of arc fault breakers needed, all arc fault desig-
nated loads must be manually assigned. If there are arc fault loads that
haven’t been assigned when you do an auto-assign, a warning prompt
appears.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual i

What’s New

Bug Fixes A problem with custom keypads not appearing as custom during database
conversion has been fixed.

A problem with an individual line item being added to custom keypads has
been fixed.

An arc fault load can no longer be assigned to the bottom half of a dual 20-
amp dimmer.

Problems with changing station defaults and using the “Apply to SetAll”
function has been fixed.

A problem with default values from macros not showing up has been
fixed.

A problem with exporting jobs that contained unadressable keypads has

been fixed.

ii LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Table of Contents
1 Design Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Checklist of Design Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Install LiteWare 3.62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
LiteWare 3.62 Full Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
LiteWare 3.62 Patch Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

3 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Start/Exit LiteWare 3.6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Main Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Job Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Switch Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Load and Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Station and Gang Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Move and Resize Window Panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Using the Mouse and Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Set Up Job Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Station & Button Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Load Group Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
JPG Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

4 Database Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Add a New Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual iii

Table of Contents

Open a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Open Other LiteWare Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Import LiteWare 3.0-3.07 Database File (*.mdb) . . . . . . . . . 35
Import LiteWare 2.xx Job File (*.lwj). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Open LiteTouch 5000 Program File (*.prg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Open LiteTouch Standard/Compact Definition File
(*.def/*.cdf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Save a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Save As or Back Up a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Add a Job to a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Delete a Job from a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

5 Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Station Info – Power Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Line Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Enclosure Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Central Controller (CCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5000LC CCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Standard or Compact CCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Comms/Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Communications Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Telephone Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
LED Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Switch/LED Invert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
LED Invert Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Dimmer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Timed Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Scene Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Scene Preset Levels (Standard CCU Only) . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Interlock Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Daylight Savings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Switch Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Vacation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Vacation Active Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Assign Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CCU Function Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Job Description/Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

iv LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Table of Contents

6 Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Add a Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Edit a Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Delete a Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Print a Fixture Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

7 Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Add a Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Edit a Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Change Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Delete a Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Print a Load Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

8 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Enclosures View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Assign Loads (Auto-Assign) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Auto-Assign Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Location Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Change Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Estimate Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Enclosure Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Add an Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Edit an Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Delete an Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Print an Enclosure Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Module Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Add a Module or Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Edit a Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Delete a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

9 Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Set Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Add a Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Station Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Face-plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Miscellaneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Customize Gang Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Buttons Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Edit a Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Copy a Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual v

Table of Contents

Delete a Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Save Keypad as .JPG Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Edit a Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Attributes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Programming Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Close (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Combination (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Dimmer (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Dimmer (Master) (Standard/Compact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Dimmer (Single) (Standard/Compact). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Lower (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Lower (Single) (Standard/Compact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Momentary (All CCUs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Motion Control (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
On, Off (5000LC)
Master On, Master Off (Standard/Compact) . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Master Off Toggle (Standard/Compact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Open (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Open/Close (Standard/Compact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Raise (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Raise (Single) (Standard/Compact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Scene (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Scene Preset Toggle (Standard/Compact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Scene On (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Switch Pointer (5000LC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Timed Flash (Standard/Compact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Timed On, Timed Toggle (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Timed Toggle (Standard/Compact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Toggle (On), Toggle (Off) (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Toggle (Single) (Standard/Compact). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
User (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Vacation (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Vacation Switch (Standard/Compact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Load Group Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Add a Load Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Set Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Switch Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Delete a Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

vi LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Table of Contents

Switch Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Load and Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Assign or Change a Load Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Add a Load Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Edit a Load Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Copy a Load Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Delete a Load Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Station and Gang Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Print a Station Design Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

10 Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Add a Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Timer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Programming Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
5000LC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Scene On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Standard/Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Load Group Tab (5000 LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Add a Load Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Set Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Timer/Switch Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Edit a Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Copy a Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Delete a Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Print a Timer Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Edit DST and Astronomical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Daylight Savings (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Time Zone (All CCUs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Astronomical (All CCUs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Show Vacation Mode Timers (5000LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

11 Billing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Billing Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Create Billing from Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Update Bill of Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual vii

Table of Contents

Add Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Edit Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Delete Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Print Bill of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

12 5000LC Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Programming Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Program Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
The Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Query/Change System Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Arithmetic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
State and Global Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Start and Stop the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Program Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Add Comments to a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Conditional Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Conditional Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Reentrant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
User Program Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
(Step 1) Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
(Alternate Step) [Get Macro]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
(Step 2) Reentrant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
(Step 3) Functions 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
(Step 4) Sort Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
(Step 5) Load Group
Load
Station
Switch
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
(Step 6) Functions 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
(Step 7) LED Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
(Step 8) Program Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Save and Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Program Functions List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Arithmetic Operators and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

13 5000LC Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Import a Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Activate a Switch's LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

viii LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Table of Contents

Create a Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Control Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Control Tag Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Control Tag Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
ProgramType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
DefineParam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Insert the Parameters
into the Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Reentrant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
LEDUpdate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Macro Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Timed (On). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Pathway Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Scene Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Three-Speed Fan Control Using Hunter Speed Controller . 212

14 Import/Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Import Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Import Billing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Import Fixtures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Import LWJ File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Import 5000LC Program File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Import Standard or Compact Program File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Program File Import Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Import LW3.0 MDB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Export Billing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Export Fixtures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Export Program File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Error Checking of Program Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Export MCS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
To/From CCU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Set Up Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Job Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Central Controller Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Connection Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Serial Port Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual ix

Table of Contents

TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Upload a Program File to the CCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Download a Program File from the CCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Set the CCU Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5000LC CCU Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Control Station Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Keypad Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Control Module Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Compact CCU Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Station Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Module Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

x LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Design Basics 1

This chapter provides an overview of LiteTouch® design components,

concepts, and program functions. For specific information about Lite-
Touch products, refer to the applicable LiteTouch documentation.

Job A job contains one complete lighting control design. One or more jobs can
be saved to a “project database file,” described below.

Project Database File A project database file is an ODBC database file that contains one or more
jobs (see above). You can create as many project database files as you
need for your design work. The LiteWare® 3.62 project database file uses
a Microsoft® Access 97 format, and the database file can be viewed, if
necessary, in Microsoft Access.

All project database files are saved with an .lwd extension. Refer to Chap-
ter 4, “Database Functions” for information.

Program File The program file contains all keypad and load information and switch
assignments in a form that can be uploaded to the CCU. The 5000LC CCU
uses a single program file with a .prg extension. The Standard CCU uses a
single program file with a .def extension. The Compact CCU uses a single
program file with a .cdf extension. The Standard/Compact program file is
also called a definition file.

Load A load is an electrical load. Any device controlled by the LiteTouch con-
trol system is considered a load. Loads are described by type (e.g., incan-
descent, fluorescent, low voltage, etc.) and their wattage and voltage rat-
ings. Loads are normally identified from blueprints.

Load Group A load group is a group of loads (and their parameters) used together in a
switch or timer assignment. A load group may consist of a single load,
several loads, or all loads in the load list. Once created, you can set dim-
mer, ramp, and fade levels for each load group, as well as load preset or
minimum turn on levels.

Module A control module, or module, is a switching or dimming device capable of

handling up to eight loads, depending on the type. All loads controlled by
the LiteTouch control system must be attached to an appropriate module.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 1

 Design Basics

LiteTouch manufactures a broad range of modules including:

• Eight-channel dimmer module (120, 240, 277 VAC)

• Quad dimmer module (120, 240 VAC)
• Fluorescent dimmer module (120, 240, 277 VAC)
• Eight-channel relay module (120. 240 VAC)
• Low voltage relay module
• DC motor control relay module
• Electronic (inverse phase) dimmer module (120. 240 VAC)
• Electronic ballast (0–10 VDC) dimmer module (120, 240, 277 VAC)
• Fan speed control module
• High power relay (120, 240, 277 VAC)

For detailed information on LiteTouch modules, refer to LiteTouch prod-

uct data sheets, available upon request.

Data Input Modules A data input module is a keypad bus module with switch inputs rather than
loads that allow external signals to control LiteTouch loads. Typical signal
sources include RF remotes, security systems, photo cells, and motion
sensors. A data input module connects to a keypad line from the CCU for
power and communication.

The inputs on a data input module function the same as the switches on a
keypad. The inputs accept a contact closure from an external device that is
wired to them. This contact closure is the same as a button press. If the
contact for an input is closed and released, it is the same as a button press
and release. If the contact is closed and remains closed for longer than
four-tenths of a second, it is the same as a button press. When the contact
is opened, it is the same as a button release.

LiteTouch manufactures two type of data input modules. Both modules

have 8 (6 to 32 volt) DC inputs available.

• Momentary contact data input module

• Maintained contact data input module

Power Supply A DC power supply is required for Standard and Compact central control
units and is used to power all LiteTouch control devices. One power sup-
ply can power up to 35 keypads. A power supply must be within 50 feet of
the central control unit.

2 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Design Basics

Enclosure A rough-in enclosure is a surface or recess mounted box that houses the
modules. Two sizes are available: four-module and two-module. Each
enclosure comes with a hinged lid for easy access.

You need to determine early in the design process where enclosures will
be located. You can best utilize the modules if all enclosures are placed in
the same location. However, wiring can often be simplified by establishing
two or more enclosure locations within the structure. You will need to con-
sider both issues when placing enclosures.

Station/Keypad A station or keypad contains one or more switches to control loads. A

gang is a single unit that may contain from one to nine buttons. Each but-
ton is an independent switch that can control any number of loads in the
system. Multiple gangs may be connected together to form a keypad (up to
eight). Keypads come in various designs and colors. Each button's func-
tion is printed on the button, and each button has an LED. When not in
use, a button glows at 5% intensity; when in use, at 100% intensity.

SatiLite Keypad The SatiLite keypad is a simplified wall box dimmer keypad using the
Metropolitan Series buttons. It is available in three models:

• Simple one-button dimmer that can be connected to the module bus

• Two-button unit with one simple dimmer switch and one fully pro-
grammable switch that can connect to both the module and keypad bus
• Three-way switch unit for use with the SatiLite Wall-Box Dimmer
when additional points of control are required. It is used to replace the
toggle switch in a three-way lighting installation and allow load control
from a remote location.

Switch or Button A switch on a keypad may also be referred to as a button. Technically, the
“button” is the object that is pressed, and the “switch” is the device acti-
vated when the button is pressed, but it is simpler to view the two terms as
meaning the same thing. Switch and button are used interchangeably in
LiteWare 3.6 and in this manual.

Master Keypad A master keypad is capable of simulating up to 32 existing keypads, or it

can be customized. A master keypad may be located anywhere in a home
(e.g., master bedroom, exits, etc.). If control is based on existing keypads
located throughout the home, each keypad is identified by name or loca-
tion through the master menu. A master keypad is programmed using a
control program uploaded to it via a serial port.

Central Control Unit The central control unit (CCU) receives all keypad requests, interprets
them, and then switches the specified loads. A system requires only one
CCU. The CCU uses non-volatile memory to retain programming indefi-

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 3

 Design Basics

nitely. In addition, current system status is retained through power inter-

ruptions of up to three days.

The CCU employs an astronomical clock/calendar that can be used to turn

system loads on or off. By using an astronomical clock, load schedules can
be linked to sunrise and sunset and can adjust automatically to the seasons.

A CCU is programmed using a control program that is uploaded to the

CCU via a serial port. Some models come equipped with a modem, which
provides access via the telephone.

LiteWare versions 3.51 and later support the 5000LC, Standard, and Com-
pact CCUs.

Timer A timer can be used to turn loads on and off. Timers may be set by day,
days of the week, days of the month, or days of the year and may be used
for a wide variety of functions (e.g., sprinkling systems, night lighting,
vacations, holiday lighting, etc.).

Astronomical Time LiteTouch timers support astronomical time, making it possible to set up
beginning and ending functions accurately based on sunrise and sunset.

System Event A system event is the trigger or action that starts a “function” (see below).
A system event may include any of the following:

• Pressing a button (switch press)

• Holding a button (switch hold)
• Releasing a button (switch release)
• Matching a timer's start time (timer begin)
• Matching a timer’s end time (timer end)
• Entering a combination code (user event)
• Starting or restarting the CCU (startup or initialization)

Function A function is a response to a system event. When an event occurs, such as

pressing a button, the system responds by executing the specified function.
There are several predefined functions (e.g., Dimmer function, Combina-
tion function, Momentary, Toggle (On) and (Off), etc.). On the 5000LC, a
user function can be programmed for any response supported by the
LiteTouch system.

4 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Design Basics Checklist of Design Steps

Checklist of Design Steps

When designing a new lighting control system using LiteWare 3.6, you
will normally take the following steps:

❒ Install LiteWare 3.6. Refer to Chapter 2, “Installation” on page 7.

❒ Review the Getting Started chapter to get acquainted with LiteWare

3.6’s layout and features. Refer to Chapter 3, “Getting Started” on
page 13.

❒ Create a new job. Refer to “Add a New Database” on page 31 and

“Add a Job to a Database” on page 40.

❒ Use the “Defaults” option to add keypad/button and load group

defaults for the job. Refer to “Set Up Job Defaults” on page 26.

❒ Use the Job Parameters view to specify the locations of the module
enclosures, the location of the CCU (which must be within 50 feet of
an enclosure location), and other system parameters. Refer to Chapter
5, “Job Parameters” on page 43.

❒ Create a fixture list. Refer to Chapter 6, “Fixtures” on page 59.

❒ Create a load list. Review the load list for errors before proceeding.
Refer to Chapter 7, “Loads” on page 63.

❒ Assign the loads to modules. You can have LiteWare assign the loads
automatically and then manually add any modules or assignments that
LiteWare could not identify. Loads are assigned by location. Review
the load list for errors before proceeding. Refer to Chapter 8, “Enclo-
sures” on page 71.

❒ Create a bill of materials, which covers enclosures, modules, power

supply, CCU, and so on. Refer to Chapter 11, “Billing” on page 169.

❒ Modify the design as needed.

❒ During the finishing phase of the project, determine the keypads

needed for each location in the home. Enter the description for the but-

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 5

Checklist of Design Steps Design Basics

ton engraving so the keypads can be ordered. Refer to Chapter 9, “Sta-

tions” on page 93.

❒ Print and review the keypad design schedule carefully. Refer to “Print
a Station Design Schedule” on page 146.

❒ Regenerate (or complete) the bill of materials. Refer to Chapter 11,

“Billing” on page 169.

❒ Assign the appropriate loads and make the applicable settings for each
button on each keypad. Refer to Chapter 9, “Stations” on page 93.

❒ Add any timers required for the job, and assign the appropriate load
group to each timer. Refer to Chapter 10, “Timers” on page 149.

❒ Export the program file for the job to the LiteTouch system. Refer to
Chapter 14, “Import/Export” on page 215.

6 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Installation 2

This chapter provides information on installing LiteTouch's LiteWare 3.6

design software.

NOTE ☞ LiteTouch is always working to improve the LiteWare 3.6 design software. Be
sure to check the LiteTouch Web site at www.litetouch.com periodically for new
releases of LiteWare.

System Requirements
LiteWare 3.62 is designed to operate with the following minimum com-
puter requirements:

Processor: Pentium or better processor, 133 MHz or faster

Memory: 64 MB or more RAM

Hard Disk: 20 MB hard disk space available

Video: 800 x 600 or higher SVGA resolution

Operating System: Microsoft® Windows® 98, Windows Millennium Edition, Windows

NT®, Windows 2000®, or Windows XP

Install LiteWare 3.62

LiteWare3.62 can be obtained from LiteTouch on CD or downloaded from
their Web Site at www.litetouch.com. If you are installing LiteWare soft-
ware for the first time, refer to “LiteWare 3.62 Full Build” on page 8. If

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 7

Install LiteWare 3.62 Installation

you already have a version of LiteWare 3.x on your computer, you can
install the patch (see “LiteWare 3.62 Patch Build” on page 12).

LiteWare 3.62 If you are installing LiteWare for the first time, or if you have a version of
LiteWare older than 3.x on your computer, you need to install the “Lite-
Full Build Ware 3.62 Full Build.”

NOTE ☞ If you have a LiteWare3.x version on your computer, you can install LiteWare
3.62 more quickly from the “LiteWare 3.62 Patch Build” rather than the full
build. However, it will not harm your existing files if you do install the full build;
your existing Projects folder will not be changed, and the full build installation
will perform any system clean-up that is required for the new version.

Do the following to install the full version of LiteWare 3.62 on your com-
puter:

1. Close all Windows applications before starting installation.

2. Insert the LiteTouch CD in your CD-ROM drive or locate the installa-

tion file you downloaded from the LiteTouch Web site.

3. Go to your CD-ROM drive or the folder to which you downloaded the

application, and double-click the file name, LiteWare 3.62 Full
Build.exe, which is a zipped installation file. The following prompt is
displayed.

4. Click [Yes], and the following prompt is displayed.

8 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Installation Install LiteWare 3.62

5. Click [Setup] to continue, and the files in the installation zipped file are
decompressed and installed in a temporary directory on your hard
drive. Then the following window is displayed.

6. Click [Next] to continue, and the following window is displayed.

The folder to which the LiteWare 3.62 program will be copied is

shown.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 9

Install LiteWare 3.62 Installation

7. To accept the default, click [Next]. To install LiteWare 3.62 in a differ-

ent folder, click [Browse], and select or create a different folder, then
click [Next] to proceed.

The following window is displayed.

8. The “Projects” folder is the folder in which project database files are
saved, as well as the default folder opened when you select the “New,”
“Open,” and “Save” options. To accept the default folder name and
path shown in this window as your Projects folder, click [Next].

To use a different folder, click [Browse], select or create a different

folder, then click [Next] to proceed.

10 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Installation Install LiteWare 3.62

The files are copied to your hard disk, then the following window
appears.

9. You need to restart your computer before running LiteWare 3.62 .

Select Yes, I want to restart my computer now to restart your computer.

If you select No, I will restart my computer later, remember to restart

your computer before you run LiteWare 3.62 .

10. Click [Finish] to complete the installation process. If you selected Yes, I
want to restart my computer now, your computer will restart automati-
cally.

If you selected No, I will restart my computer later, you are returned to
the CD menu. Click [Exit] to exit the CD.

After your computer is restarted, you can start the LiteWare3.62 applica-
tion. If you have used LiteWare 3.x before, refer to “What’s New” on
page i for information on what has changed in LiteWare 3.62 . Refer to
Chapter 3, “Getting Started” on page 13 for general information on
LiteWare3.62 .

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 11

Install LiteWare 3.62 Installation

LiteWare 3.62 If you have a LiteWare3.x version on your computer, you can install Lite-
Ware 3.62 using the “LiteWare 3.62 Patch Build” rather than the full build.
Patch Build Your existing Projects folder will not be changed, and the installation will
perform any system clean-up that is required for the new version.

If you are installing LiteWare for the first time, or if you have a version of
LiteWare older than 3.x on your computer, you need to install the “Lite-
Ware 3.62 Full Build” (refer to page 8).

Do the following to install the upgrade version of LiteWare 3.62 on your

computer:

1. Close all Windows applications before starting installation.

2. Insert the LiteTouch CD in your CD-ROM drive or locate the installa-

tion file you downloaded from the LiteTouch Web site.

3. Go to your CD-ROM drive or the folder to which you downloaded the

application, and double-click the file name, LiteWare 3.62 Patch
Build.exe, which is a zipped installation file. The following prompt is
displayed.

4. Click [OK], and the following prompt is displayed.

5. Click [Setup] to continue, and the files in the installation zipped file are
decompressed and installed in the LiteWare folder.

You can start LiteWare 3.62 without restarting your computer. Refer to the
“What’s New” section at the beginning of this manual for information on
the changes in LiteWare version 3.62 .

12 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Getting Started 3

The LiteWare 3.6 software package is provided to designers of LiteTouch

systems to aid with the design, ordering, and programming of lighting
control systems. LiteWare 3.6 simplifies the designing and programming
of control systems and is used to do the following:

• Design the basic lighting control system step-by-step.

• Generate a bill of materials of LiteTouch components.
• Assign loads and a function to each switch on each keypad.
• Add timers and assign loads and functions to them.
• Add vacation settings and a startup event.
• Create user programs for functions and system events as required.
• Generate and upload the file used to operate the control system.

Using LiteWare 3.6 you can control how a switch functions by adding or
editing the switch’s programming. To make this easier, LiteWare 3.6 inte-
grates programming into the design software, making it possible to review
and edit programming at the dialog box for each switch or event. Instruc-
tions for programming a switch function are provided in this manual.

When the project is finished, the lighting design that you have created and
programmed is used to compile and upload the programming code to the
central control unit. The control system design can be edited (and the pro-
gramming code regenerated) as required.

Start/Exit LiteWare 3.6

To start LiteWare 3.6, click the Windows [Start] button, select Programs
select LiteTouch, then click (LiteWare3.62.00). The main
window is displayed (see next section).

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 13

Main Window Getting Started

Exit LiteWare 3.6 To exit LiteWare 3.6, pull down the File menu and click Exit, or click the
close button ([X]) in the top, right corner of the main window.

Main Window
At the LiteWare 3.6 main window, you select the “view” applicable to
each phase of your design project. You perform all design and program
functions in the various views. Each view contains the fields and data
required to complete that part of the lighting control system design. Views
include Job Parameters, Fixtures, Loads, Enclosures, Stations, Timers, and
Billing.

The Job Parameters view (with all main window panes closed) is shown
below.

14 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Getting Started Main Window

NOTE ☞ If the main window is not maximized, use the scroll bars on the right and bot-
tom to see the parts of the view that are not visible. Click the minimize/maxi-
mize button in the upper right corner to maximize the window (expand it to
fill the screen), or resize the main window as described in “Move and Resize
Window Panes” on page 19.

The Job Parameters view is selected when you start LiteWare 3.6. To
change to a different view, click the view name on the view selection bar.

You can customize the main window using the options on the View menu.
Use these options to show or hide any of the following LiteWare toolbars
or panes:

• Toolbar (see “Toolbar” on page 24)

• Status Bar (see “Status Bar” on page 25)
• Job Tree (see “Job Tree” on page 16)
• Switch Summary (see “Switch Summary” on page 17)
• Station and Gang Summary (see “Station and Gang Summary” on
page 19)
• Load and Programming Summary (see “Load and Programming Sum-
mary” on page 18)

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 15

Main Window Getting Started

The main window with all available panes and toolbars displayed is shown
below.

Switch Summary

View

Load and Programming

Summary

Station and Gang Summary

Job Tree

Panes can be docked to the main window either horizontally or vertically

or they can be displayed as a separate window. For details on customizing
your display, refer to “Move and Resize Window Panes” on page 19.

Job Tree You need to display the Job Tree if you are working with a project data-
base that contains more than one job. In multi-job databases, you use the
Job Tree to select the job with which you want to work. In the example
below, the project database file contains three jobs.

To show or hide the Job Tree, pull down the View menu and click Job Tree.

16 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Getting Started Main Window

Click a job name to select the job. Click [+] next to a job name to expand
the tree for the job. Click a view name beneath the job to go to that view. If
a project database has only one job, the Job Tree is not needed.

Switch The Switch Summary lists all keypad switches for the currently selected
job. Switches are grouped by keypad. The Switch Summary can be dis-
Summary played all of the time but is most appropriate in the Stations view.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 17

Main Window Getting Started

Refer to “Switch Summary” on page 138 for more information.

Load and You use the Load and Programming Summary to add and maintain load
groups and to assign loads or load groups to a switch on a keypad or to a
Programming timer.

Summary In the example below, the Load and Programming Summary displays the
loads controlled by the switch identified as “ST2:GO2:B5.”

To show or hide the Load and Programming Summary, pull down the
View menu and click Load and Programming Summary.

When you select a switch or timer in the Stations view, the loads assigned
to the switch or timer are moved to the top of the list and highlighted.
Refer to “Load and Programming Summary” on page 139 for more infor-
mation.

When you are not working with keypads or timers, you do not need to dis-
play the Load and Programming Summary.

18 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Getting Started Main Window

Station and The Station and Gang Summary lists information about each keypad,
including gang data, keypad type, and faceplate style and color for the cur-
Gang Summary rently selected job. For keypads that have multiple gangs, a separate line is
added to the summary to describe each gang. In the Station view, select a
keypad or gang in the Station and Gang Summary pane, and the selected
keypad is outlined in the Station view. Or select a keypad or gang in the
Station view to highlight it in the Station and Gang Summary.

Refer to “Station and Gang Summary” on page 145 for more information.

Move and The Job Tree, Switch Summary, Load and Programming Summary, and
Station and Gang Summary window panes can be resized and/or moved to
Resize Window any location in the main window.

Panes Each window “pane” has a “docking bar” at the top

when the pane is docked, or in a fixed position, in the window.

To move the pane, click the docking bar, hold down the mouse button, and
drag the pane to another location in the window. As you drag it, you will
see an outline that indicates the position and size it will be. When it is in
the position you want, release the mouse button. If you move a pane to a
floating, or undocked, position, the docking bar changes to a title bar. To
move a floating pane, click the title bar, hold down the mouse button, and
drag the pane. When you move it into a docked position, the docking bar
appears again.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 19

Main Window Getting Started

NOTE ☞ If you do not want the pane to “snap” into a docked position, hold down the
<Ctrl> key as you drag it. It then becomes a floating pane that can be posi-
tioned anywhere on the screen.

Docked positions are on either side and at the top and bottom of the main
window. If all panes are open, they can be positioned one on top of the
other on either side, side by side on either side, one on each side of the
window, one at the top and one at the bottom of the window, or side by
side at the top or bottom of the window. If positioned at the top or bottom
of the window, the docking bar appears on the left side of the pane.

To resize a window pane, move the mouse pointer over any side or corner
until the pointer changes to directional arrows. Click and hold the mouse
button, and drag the side or corner of the pane until it is the size you want,
then release the mouse button.

NOTE ☞ You can resize the main window using the same method.

To close a window pane, click the [x] on the docking bar or title bar. To
show the pane again, select it from the View menu.

Menu Bar The menus at the top of the main window contain options used to perform
database, job related, and editing functions, select features available on the
main window, and access online Help. Click a menu name and the menu
drops down from the menu bar. Click an option on the menu to select the
function. You can also select an option by typing the underlined letter in
the option name, if available.

File Following are the options available on the File menu:

New Create a new LiteWare 3.6 project database file. Each database file may
contain one or more “jobs.” Refer to “Add a New Database” on page 31
for more information.

Open Open an existing LiteWare 3.6 project database file, or import a file from a
previous LiteWare version. Refer to “Open a Database” on page 33 for
more information.

Save Save the current project database file. Refer to “Save a Database” on
page 38 for more information.

20 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Getting Started Main Window

Save As Save the current project database file to a different name or in a different
folder. You can use this function to back up the project database file. Refer
to “Save a Database” on page 38 for more information.

Import The following Import options are available:

Import Billing
Import a billing file into LiteWare 3.6 that was exported from third-
party software (e.g., your company’s software or a spreadsheet pro-
gram). The file must be in a comma-delimited text format (.txt).

Import Fixtures
Import a fixture list (.fix extension) into LiteWare 3.6 that was
exported from another LiteWare project database file .

Import LWJ File

Import an .lwj file into LiteWare 3.6. .lwj files are used in LiteWare
2.XX.

Import 5000LC Program File

Import a program file downloaded from a 5000LC CCU into LiteWare
3.6 and convert it to a job, which is added to the current project data-
base file. You use the To/From CCU function to receive a program file
from the CCU. Refer to “Import 5000LC Program File” on page 219
for more information.

Import Standard/Compact Program File

Import a program file for a Standard or Compact CCU into LiteWare
3.6. The program definitions can be taken from the program file (.def
or .cdf), also called a definition file, or collectively from the other files
associated with the job. The data is imported into the currently opened
project database file as a new job. You use the To/From CCU function
to receive a program file from the CCU. Refer to “Import Standard or
Compact Program File” on page 220 for more information.

Import LW3.0 MDB

Import a project database file created in a previous version of Lite-
Ware (3.0 – 3.07) into LiteWare 3.6. The .mdb file is converted to a
new database file with an .lwd extension. The original .mdb file is
retained unchanged so you can load it into an earlier version of Lite-
Ware or use it as a backup that will load into either version of Lite-
Ware. (LiteWare3.08 and later files have the .lwd extension and can be
opened in LiteWare 3.6 without importing.)

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 21

Main Window Getting Started

Export The following Export options are available:

Export Billing
Create a billing file that can be imported into a third-party software
application (e.g., your company’s software or a spreadsheet program).

Export Fixtures
Create a fixture list that can be imported into another LiteWare 3.6
project database file.

Export Program File

Create a program file for the currently selected job. A program file is
used by a LiteTouch CCU. After you create a program file, you use the
To/From CCU function to send the program file to the CCU. Refer to
“Export Program File” on page 225 for more information.

Export MCS File

Create a file for the master keypad or master control station (MCS). A
master keypad is programmed using a control program uploaded to it
via a serial port. After you create a master keypad file, you use the
mcs.exe utility to upload the file to the master keypad. Refer to “Export
MCS File” on page 227 for more information.

To/From CCU Open the Communications dialog box that is used to upload a program file
to the CCU, download a program file from the CCU, set the time and date
in the CCU, or perform diagnostics on the Compact or 5000LC CCUs.
Refer to “To/From CCU” on page 230 for information.

Print Print information from the currently selected view (Job Parameters, Fix-
tures, Loads, Enclosures, etc.). A standard Windows Print dialog box is
displayed. From this dialog box, you can select a printer, set printer prop-
erties, specify a print range, and select the number of copies to print. You
also have the option to print the report to a file. You can use the Print Pre-
view option (see below) to view the data before printing it.

Print Preview View a report on-screen or preview a report before printing it. [Next Page]
and [Previous Page] buttons are provided to move through a multi-page
report. A [Two Page] button is available to display two pages at a time. For
on-screen viewing, there are three levels of magnification available using
the [Zoom In] and [Zoom Out] buttons. (The [Two Page] and [Zoom] buttons
are not yet fully implemented.) To print the report from the Print Preview
window, click [Print].

Print Setup Set up the printer before printing a report. A standard Windows Print
Setup dialog box is displayed. From this dialog box, you can select a

22 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Getting Started Main Window

printer, set printer properties, select a different paper size or paper source,
and specify the paper orientation (landscape or portrait).

Last Loaded Files The names of the last project database files loaded (up to nine) are listed at
the bottom of the menu. To open one of these files, click it.

Exit Exit LiteWare 3.6.

Edit Following are the options available on the Edit menu:

Undo Reverse, or undo, the last action. Specifically, Undo reverses actions such
as the deletion of keypads, modules, etc. (This function is not yet imple-
mented.)

Cut/Copy/Paste Move keypads, modules, enclosures, loads, etc. from one job to another.
(These functions are not yet implemented.)

Add Job Add a job to the current project database file. Refer to “Add a Job to a
Database” on page 40 for more information. You can rename a job in the
Job Parameters view.

Delete Job Delete the currently displayed (or selected) job from the database file. A
message confirms the action. Refer to “Delete a Job from a Database” on
page 40 for more information.

View Following are the options available on the View menu:

Toolbar Show or hide the toolbar. Refer to “Toolbar” on page 24 for information
on the toolbar functions.

Status Bar Show or hide the status bar. Refer to “Status Bar” on page 25 for informa-
tion on status bar functions.

Job Tree Show or hide the Job Tree. Refer to “Job Tree” on page 16 for information
on the Job Tree.

Switch Summary Show or hide the Switch Summary. Refer to “Switch Summary” on
page 17 for information.

Station and Gang Summary Show or hide the Station and Gang Summary. Refer to “Station and Gang
Summary” on page 19 for information.

Load and Programming Show or hide the Load and Programming Summary. Refer to “Load and
Summary Programming Summary” on page 18 for information.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 23

Main Window Getting Started

Options Following are the options available on the Options menu:

Defaults Add keypad/button and load group defaults for the current job or all jobs.

Help Following are the options available on the Help menu:

Help Topics View the Help “Contents” and access online Help messages. You can also
press <F1> at any dialog box or window to view online Help contents.

LiteTouch on the Web Select one of the options to open your Web browser and go directly to the
Litetouch Web site, as follows:

LiteTouch Website
Go to the main LiteTouch Web site.

LiteWare Updates
Go directly to the Web page to download the latest update to LiteWare.

LiteTouch Support
Go directly to the LiteTouch Support Web page.

About LiteWare Display the LiteWare version and other information.

Toolbar The toolbar contains buttons, or tools, to select commonly used LiteWare
3.6 functions. To show or hide the toolbar, pull down the View menu and
click Toolbar.

Click to create a new LiteWare 3.6 project database file. Each database file
may contain one or more “jobs.” Refer to “Add a New Database” on
page 31 for more information.

Click to open an existing LiteWare 3.6 project database file. Refer to

“Open a Database” on page 33 for more information.

Click to save the current database file. Refer to “Save a Database” on

page 38 for more information.

Click to add a job to the current project database file. Refer to “Add a Job
to a Database” on page 40 for more information. You can rename a job in
the Job Parameters view.

24 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Getting Started Using the Mouse and Keyboard

Click to delete the currently displayed (or selected) job from the database
file. A message confirms your intent. Refer to “Delete a Job from a Data-
base” on page 40 for more information.

Click to move fixtures, keypads, modules, enclosures, loads, etc. from one
job to another. (These functions are not yet implemented.)

Click to print information from the currently selected view (Job Parame-
ters, Fixtures, Loads, Enclosures, etc.). A standard Windows Print dialog
box is displayed. From this dialog box, you can select a printer, set printer
properties, specify a print range, and select the number of copies you want
to print. You also have the option to print the report to a file. You can use
the Print Preview tool (see below) to view the data before printing it.

Click to view a report on-screen or to preview a report before printing it.

[Next Page] and [Previous Page] buttons are provided to move through a
multi-page report. A [Two Page] button is available to display two pages at
a time. For on-screen viewing, there are three levels of magnification
available using the [Zoom In] and [Zoom Out] buttons. (The [Two Page] and
[Zoom] buttons are not yet fully implemented.) To print the report from the
Print Preview window, click [Print].

Click to display the LiteWare 3.6 version and other information.

Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays Help messages
for menu options and toolbar buttons. Move the mouse pointer over a tool-
bar button or a menu option, and a description of the function is shown on
the status bar. To show or hide the status bar, pull down the View menu
and click Status Bar.

Using the Mouse and Keyboard

 Move the mouse pointer over an item and click the left mouse button to do
any of the following:

• Open a menu or folder

• Select an option from a menu
• Select a button or tool

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 25

Set Up Job Defaults Getting Started

• Select an item in a list

• Move the cursor to a cell in a table

In most cases, you can double-click an item in a list to select it. Dou-
ble-clicking is the same as selecting an item and clicking [OK].

You can use your mouse scroll wheel in the Station, Enclosure, and Timer
views.

 You can also use the following keyboard “shortcuts:”

• To open a menu, press and hold <Alt> and type the underlined letter in
the menu name.
• To select a function from a menu, type the underlined letter.
• Within a view or dialog box, move from field to field (or cell to cell in
a table) by pressing <Tab>. Press <Shift><Tab> (press and hold
<Shift> while pressing <Tab>) to move backwards.

Set Up Job Defaults

You can set up keypad/button and load group defaults for the current job or
for all jobs in the current database file. Your defaults should represent the
most likely configuration for new keypads and load groups. Then, when
you create a new keypad or load group, you will only need to make entries
to fields that are different from the defaults. You can set up defaults from
any view. To set job default properties, pull down the Options menu, and
select Defaults.

NOTE ☞ You can also set some keypad/button defaults for the current job by clicking
the [Set Defaults] button in the Stations view (see “Set Defaults” on page 98).
However, you can only set up defaults for all jobs in the database using this
option. Load group defaults can only be set using this option and apply to all
new load groups and to all loads added to existing load groups.

26 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Getting Started Set Up Job Defaults

Station & If it is not already selected, click the Station & Button tab to set defaults for
keypad and button type and colors.
Button Tab

Use As Defaults for All Select this option to apply the defaults to all new jobs in the database. If
New Jobs not selected, the defaults will apply only to the current job.

Station Type Click and select the keypad type for which you want to set defaults
from the drop-down list. All keypads available in LiteWare 3.6 are listed
(stock items).

Face-Plate Color Click and select a default color for the keypad’s face-plate.

Face-Plate Style Click and select a default style for the keypad’s face-plate.

Bezel Color Click and select a default color for the keypad’s bezel, if applicable.

Button Color Click and select a default color for the buttons.

Text Color Click and select a default color for the engraving on the buttons.

LED Color Click and select a default color for the LEDs on the buttons.

Click [Apply] to save the changes in this tab without exiting the dialog box.
Click [OK] to save the defaults and exit the dialog box.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 27

Set Up Job Defaults Getting Started

Load Group Click the Load Group tab to set defaults for the load groups. Refer to
“Load Group Tab” on page 132 for more detailed information on each
Tab option.

Use As Defaults for All Select this option to apply the defaults to all new jobs in the database. If
New Jobs not selected, the defaults will apply only to the current job.

Preset Level/Minimum On This entry applies to several function types. Enter the default preset level
(where 0 is no light and 100 is full brightness).

Minimum Dim Level (Dimmer functions) Enter the default minimum dim value for the load
when ramping.

Maximum Dim Level (Dimmer functions) Enter the default maximum dim value for the load
when ramping.

Fade On (sec) Enter the default number of seconds that the fade-on should last. This is
the time from initial “turn on” until the preset, last known, or minimum
turn-on level is reached.

Fade Off (sec) Enter the default number of seconds that the fade-off should last. This is
the time from the “on” state to the “off” state.

Ramp Time (Dimmer functions) Enter the default amount of time (in seconds) that it
will take to go from the minimum dim level to the maximum dim level
(and vice versa) when the switch is held in.

28 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Getting Started Set Up Job Defaults

Click [Apply] to save the changes in this tab without exiting the dialog box.
Click [OK] to save the defaults and exit the dialog box.

JPG Settings Click the JPG Settings tab to set up the default size and compression qual-
ity of the .jpg images of keypads saved with the “Save to JPG” option in
Tab the Stations view. Refer to “Save Keypad as .JPG Image” on page 106 for
more information on the “Save to JPG” option.

Default Scale Size Enter the scale size of the .jpg images (from 0 to 20).

Default JPG Compression Enter the compression quality of the .jpg images (1 to 100).
Quality
Click [Apply] to save the changes in this tab without exiting the dialog box.
Click [OK] to save the defaults and exit the dialog box.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 29

Set Up Job Defaults Getting Started

Notes

30 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Database Functions 4

This chapter explains how to do the following:

• Add a new project database file

• Open an existing project database file
• Save or back up a project database file
• Add a job to a project database file
• Delete a job from a project database file

When you start LiteWare 3.6, it opens with an “untitled” database and one
empty (unconfigured) job. You can open an existing database (see “Open a
Database” on page 33), or if you want to add a new database, you can sim-
ply save the untitled database and name it, and then name and start config-
uring the job (usually called Job1 by default). Refer to the next section,
“Add a New Database” for information on naming a new database. Refer
to Chapter 5, “Job Parameters” for information on starting a new job.

Add a New Database

A LiteTouch project database is an ODBC database file that may contain
one or more jobs. A “job” is defined as one complete lighting control
design. It is your choice whether to place each job in a separate project
database file or to group multiple jobs (normally associated jobs) into a
single project database. A project database may contain, for example, all
jobs in a region or development.

You can create as many project database files as you need for your design
work, each one containing one or more jobs. A LiteWare 3.6 project data-
base file uses a Microsoft Access 97 format with an .lwd extension to dis-
tinguish it from other Microsoft Access database files, which have an .mdb
extension. If necessary, a LiteWare .lwd file can be opened in Microsoft

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 31

Add a New Database Database Functions

Access. In the Access Open dialog box, “Files of Type” box, select “All
Files (*.*),” then select the .lwd file that you want to open.

Do the following to create a new project database file:

1. Click on the toolbar, or select New from the File menu to create a
new project database file. The new database is created with the name
“Untitled.”

2. To name the new project database file, click on the toolbar, or

select Save or Save As from the File menu. The Save As dialog box
appears.

3. In the “File name” box, type a name for the new project database file.
The .lwd extension is added automatically.

4. Click [Save] to save the new database with the specified file name.

A new database is created with one unconfigured job named “job” fol-
lowed by a number (e.g., Job1, Job2). Use the Job Parameters view to
rename and begin configuring the job. Refer to Chapter 5, “Job Parame-
ters” on page 43 for information and instructions.

32 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Database Functions Open a Database

Open a Database
Do the following to open an existing project database file:

1. Click on the toolbar, or select Open from the File menu, and the
following dialog box is displayed.

All .lwd files in the default folder are listed. For information on open-
ing .mdb, .lwj, .prg, .def, or .cdf file types, see “Open Other LiteWare
Files” below.

2. Click the name of the file that you want to open, then click [Open]. The
selected database file is loaded into LiteWare 3.6.

NOTE ☞ If you entered any names, comments, or descriptions that exceed the length
reserved for them in the database, they are truncated when the database is
saved. When you load the database, you will see the truncated entries. If trun-
cating an entry makes it identical to another entry, and the entry must be
unique, a character is added to the truncated entry to make it unique.

Open Other You can also use Open to open or import the following file types:

LiteWare Files • Database files from LiteWare3.0 – 3.07 (.mdb files)

• Database files from LiteWare 2.xx (.lwj files)
• Program files for the 5000LC (.prg files)
• Definition files for Standard or Compact CCUs (.def or .cdf files)

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 33

Open a Database Database Functions

Previous versions of database files are converted to the .lwd database for-
mat. The original database file is retained unchanged so you can load it
into an earlier version of LiteWare or use it as a backup that will load into
either version of LiteWare.

NOTE ☞ You can also import LiteWare database files into LiteWare 3.6 using the Import
functions. If you use Import, the old database file is added to the currently
opened database file as a new job, with the exception of .mdb files, which are
saved to a new database file (see “Import Options” on page 216 for more
information).

1. Click on the toolbar, or select Open from the File menu, and the
Open dialog box is displayed.

2. Click the drop-down arrow at the “Files of type” box, and all of the file
type options are listed.

3. Select the type of file that you want to open. All files of that type are
listed in the dialog box. Select “All Files (*.*)” to display all files in
the Projects folder.

4. Refer to the following sections for information on each LiteWare file

type.

NOTE ☞ During database conversion, some loads may be rejected during assignment to
modules due to error checking. Loads are rejected if they exceed the wattage
rating of the circuit, module, or line feed or if the load voltage is too low for the
module type. These loads can be reassigned during the next auto-assignment.
Unassigned loads show a status of “U/A” in the Load and Programming Sum-
mary pane (in the ID column) until they are reassigned. However, “zero watt
loads” are ignored during error checking as these loads must be manually
assigned (see “Program File Import Limitations” on page 222 for details on
zero watt loads).

34 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Database Functions Open a Database

Import LiteWare Project database files created in LiteWare3.0 – 3.07 have an .mdb exten-
3.0-3.07 Database sion. To open an .mdb file, do the following:

File (*.mdb) 1. Select Import LiteWare 3.00-3.07 MDB File (*.mdb) from the “Files of
type” drop-down list. All .mdb files are listed.

2. Click the name of the job that you want to open, and click [Open]. The
following message is displayed.

3. Click [OK].

The .mdb file is converted to a new database file with an .lwd exten-
sion. The original .mdb file is retained unchanged so you can load it
into an earlier version of LiteWare or use it as a backup that will load
into either version of LiteWare.

Import LiteWare Project database files created in LiteWare version 2.xx have an .lwj exten-
2.xx Job File (*.lwj) sion. To open an .lwj file, do the following:

1. Select Import LiteWare 2.XX Job File (*.lwj) from the “Files of type”
drop-down list. All .lwj files are listed.

2. Click the name of the job that you want to open, and click [Open].

3. An Import Results box is displayed showing import detail and any

errors that occurred during the import. Click [OK] to close the box.

4. Click on the toolbar, or select Save from the File menu, to save the
converted file. The Save As dialog box appears.

5. The .lwj file is converted to a new database file with an .lwd extension.
In the “File name” box, type a name for the new database file. The
.lwd extension is added automatically. The original .lwj file is retained
unchanged so you can load it into an earlier version of LiteWare or use
it as a backup that will load into either version.

6. Click [Save] to save the new database with the specified file name.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 35

Open a Database Database Functions

Open LiteTouch You can download a program file from the 5000LC and then open it in
5000 Program File LiteWare 3.6. Download the file using the “To/From CCU” option (refer
to “Download a Program File from the CCU” on page 234). To open a .prg
(*.prg) file, do the following:

1. Select LiteTouch 5000 Program File (*.prg) from the “Files of type”
drop-down list. All .prg files are listed.

2. Click the name of the program file that you want to open, and click
[Open].

If any problems occurred during the import, warning messages, such

as the following, are displayed.

3. Make note of the information in all warning messages and manually

update the specified items.

4. An Import Results box is displayed showing import detail and any

errors that occurred during the import. Make note of any errors. If nec-
essary, you can copy and paste the contents of the Import Results box
into Windows Notepad and save it. Click [OK] to close the box.

5. Click on the toolbar, or select Save from the File menu, to save the
converted file. The Save As dialog box appears.

6. The .prg file is converted to a new job with an .lwd extension. In the
“File name” box, type a name for the new job. The .lwd extension is
added automatically. The original .prg file is retained unchanged so
you can import it into an earlier version of LiteWare or use it as a
backup that will load into either version.

7. Click [Save] to save the new job with the specified file name.

8. Refer to “Program File Import Limitations” on page 222 for informa-

tion about limitations in the way the program file is converted to an
active LiteWare job.

36 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Database Functions Open a Database

NOTE ☞ In order to see the design information in a program file created in LiteWare
3.6, you must open the program file rather than importing it. (Program files
that were created in an earlier version of LiteWare do not contain design infor-
mation.)

Open LiteTouch You can open a program file compiled for a Standard or Compact CCU
Standard/Compact (.def or .cdf) in LiteWare 3.6. The program definitions can be taken from
the program file, also called a definition file, or collectively from the other
Definition File files associated with the job. All files related to the job must reside in the
same folder. LiteWare will attempt to read all of the files, but only the def-
(*.def/*.cdf) inition file (.def or .cdf) is required. The data is opened as a new project
database file with an .lwd extension.

To open a Standard or Compact definition file, do the following:

1. To open a Standard CCU file, select LiteTouch Standard Definition File

(*.def) from the “Files of type” drop-down list. All .def files are listed.

To open a Compact CCU file, select LiteTouch Compact Definition File

(*.cdf) from the “Files of type” drop-down list. All .cdf files are listed.

2. Click the name of the file that you want to open, and click [Open].

When you open a Standard/Compact definition file, LiteWare looks

for and attempts to read all of the files related to the job. If the date and
time on the .def or .cdf file are earlier than the .swp file, the .def or .cdf
file is ignored.

3. Warning messages may be displayed during the conversion. Make note

of the information in all warning messages and manually update the
specified items.

4. An Import Results box is displayed showing import detail and any

errors that occurred during the import. Note any errors. If necessary,
you can copy and paste the contents of the Import Results box into
Windows Notepad and save it. Click [OK] to close the box.

5. Click on the toolbar, or select Save from the File menu, to save the
converted file. The Save As dialog box appears.

6. The .def or .cdf file is converted to a new job with an .lwd extension. In
the “File name” box, type a name for the new job. The .lwd extension
is added automatically. The original definition file is retained
unchanged.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 37

Save a Database Database Functions

7. Click [Save] to save the new job with the specified file name.

Refer to “Program File Import Limitations” on page 222 for informa-

tion about limitations in the way the program file is converted to an
active LiteWare job.

Save a Database
To save the current (open) project database file, click on the toolbar,
or select Save from the File menu. You should save often to prevent the
loss of work in the event of a computer problem or power outage.

If you are saving a new database for the first time, the Save As dialog box
appears so that you can name the file. Refer to “Add a New Database” on
page 31 for information.

When you exit LiteWare 3.6, if any work has not been saved, you are
prompted to save before exiting, as shown below.

Click [Yes] to save the project database, or click [No] to exit without sav-
ing. Click [Cancel] to return to LiteWare 3.6.

NOTE ☞ If you entered any names, comments, or descriptions that exceed the length
reserved for them in the database, they are truncated when the database is
saved. When you load the database, you will see the truncated entries. If trun-
cating an entry makes it identical to another entry, and the entry must be
unique, a character is added to the truncated entry to make it unique.

38 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Database Functions Save a Database

Save As or Use the Save As function to save the open project database file with a dif-
ferent name or to a different folder or drive. A copy of the file is created.
Back Up a You can do any of the following with the database copy:

Database • Save it to media on a different drive (e.g., Zip disk or CD) and store it
in a secure place as a backup, or transfer it to a different computer
• Save it to a different folder or a different network drive
• Save it with a different name in the default folder, and edit the job or
jobs to create a new job(s) with a similar configuration

Do the following to make a copy of the open project database file:

1. Select Save As from the File menu, and the following dialog box is dis-
played.

2. The name of the open database is selected. If you want to save the
copy with a different name, type over the name in the “File name” box.
If you select the name of an existing database file, the file is overwrit-
ten by the copy.

3. If necessary, at the “Save in” box, click or to change the drive

and/or folder.

4. Click [Save] to save a copy of the selected project database file. The
new database (copy) is opened in LiteWare 3.6.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 39

Add a Job to a Database Database Functions

Add a Job to a Database

When you create a new database, one design job is started for you. You
can add another job or jobs to a database if desired.

It is your choice whether to place each job in a separate project database

file or to group multiple jobs (normally associated jobs) into a single
project database. A project database may contain, for example, all jobs in
a region or development.

NOTE ☞ If you have multiple jobs in a project database file, you must have the Job Tree
open in order to see the jobs or select them. To display the Job Tree, click Job
Tree on the View menu. Refer to “Job Tree” on page 16 for more information,

Do the following to add a job to the current project database file:

1. Click on the toolbar, or select Add Job from the Edit menu.

A job is added to the Job Tree and given a default name of “Job” fol-
lowed by a number (e.g., Job1, Job2, etc.).

2. Click in the “Job Name” box in the Job Parameters view to name the
new job. You may use alphabetic characters, numbers, spaces, and
symbols, up to 28 characters.

Refer to Chapter 5, “Job Parameters” on page 43 for information and

instructions to begin configuring the new job.

Delete a Job from a Database

Do the following to delete a job from the current project database:

1. Select the job that you want to delete by clicking the job name in the
Job Tree. This highlights the name and displays the job’s setup in the
Job Parameters view.

40 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Database Functions Delete a Job from a Database

2. Click on the toolbar, or select Delete Job from the Edit menu. The
following prompt is displayed.

3. To delete the job, click [Yes] and the job is deleted from the project
database. To cancel the action, click [No].

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 41

Delete a Job from a Database Database Functions

Notes

42 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Job Parameters 5

This chapter provides information on the functions performed in the Job

Parameters view. You use the Job Parameters view to do the following:

• Rename a job
• Add/edit/delete a load/enclosure location
• Set the default voltage for the job
• Select the CCU for the job
• Add/edit basic parameters of the job

The Job Parameters view is displayed by default when you open LiteWare
3.6, open a database, add a new database, or select a different job. If you
have been working in a different view, click [Parameters] on the view
selection bar to display the Job Parameters view, shown below.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 43

Station Info – Power Calculation Job Parameters

Select the Job Parameters view as required to reference or update system

information. Make entries as required to the following fields.

Job Name The name of the current job is displayed. When you open LiteWare 3.6 or
add a new database, an empty (unconfigured) job is started (usually named
“Job1”). To change the job name, click in the field, and type over or delete
the existing or default name to enter a new name. The new job name is
updated in the Job Tree when you click in a different field, select a differ-
ent view, or save the database.

Max. Circuit Power (W) Enter the maximum circuit power (in watts) for each circuit. This value is
determined by local code. If you reduce the circuit power and loads are
already assigned to modules, they may be unassigned if the module cir-
cuits exceed the new value.

Station Info – Power Calculation

Estimated # Stations LiteWare 3.6 needs to know the approximate number of keypads (single-
gang units) before it can assign a DC power supply for the lighting control
system. Because you normally design the keypads after you assign the
power supply, you must estimate the number of keypads you will need.
You should estimate on the high side. Later, if your estimate changes, you
should update this figure.

Avg. # Buttons/Station Enter the estimated average number of buttons per keypad. Later, if your
estimate changes, you should update this figure.

Use Backlit Stations? If you will be adding backlit keypads (Coastal or Metropolitan keypad
types), select this option so that LiteWare will assign the correct power
supplies. (Backlit keypads require twice as much power as non-backlit.)

Line Voltage
Select the house current used at the residence: 120 V (domestic), 240 V
(international), or 277 V (commercial). This selection determines the volt-
age of the modules assigned during auto-assignment. LiteWare does not
currently support auto-assigning multiple voltages.

44 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Job Parameters Enclosure Locations

Enclosure Locations
Use the Enclosure Locations box to list the location or locations of the
job’s loads and enclosures. You will enter loads by location (in the Loads
view), and later, in the Enclosures view, loads are assigned to modules and
modules are placed in enclosures by location.

Add a Location To add a location, type the location name (e.g., basement, 2nd floor, etc.)
in the text box, and click [Add]. The location is shown in the list beneath
the text box.

Delete a Location To delete a location, click it in the list to select it, then click [Delete].

Rename a Location To rename a location, click it to select it. Type the new name in the text
box, and click [Rename]. The new name replaces the old name in the list.

Central Controller (CCU)

LiteWare 3.6 supports all three LiteTouch CCUs: 5000LC, Standard, and
Compact. The parameters that you need to select are determined by the
type of CCU you select at the “Type” field. Information on each CCU’s
parameters is provided in the following sections.

Type Click , and select from the drop-down list the type of CCU for the job.
“5000LC” is the default CCU type. If you select a different CCU, or if you
are changing the CCU for an existing or imported job, the following
prompt is displayed.

If you change the CCU for an existing job, the functions and programming
are changed to be compatible with the selected CCU. If functions were set
up that are not supported by the new CCU, the unsupported functions are

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 45

Central Controller (CCU) Job Parameters

changed to “None.” Refer to “CCU Function Conversion” on page 55 for

information on the conversion of functions from one type of CCU to
another.

Click [OK] to proceed. If you are changing the CCU for an existing job,
any functions or programming you entered are converted and a message
appears that shows the number of switches and timers changed. Click [OK]
to proceed.

Enclosure Location Click , and select from the drop-down list (of the locations you added)
the enclosure location where you plan to place the CCU.

Refer to the following sections for information on the parameters to enter

for each type of CCU.

5000LC CCU If you select 5000LC as the CCU type, the following field is displayed.

Startup Event You can set up a startup event to execute a user program when the 5000LC
CCU is started or restarted. A startup event is not required for a job. If a
startup event is not set up, the CCU uses the last known settings at startup.
If the CCU is powered off and cards are changed, the last known settings
are lost, and the system starts with the current load settings. However, the
LED status may be incorrect until a button is pressed on each keypad.
When a startup event is defined, the system always uses it to set certain
initialized settings—not necessarily the last known setting—for loads,
LEDs, and so on.

To add a startup event to the job, click and select Startup. Then click
[Edit Startup] to set up the startup event user program.

46 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Job Parameters Central Controller (CCU)

The following dialog box is displayed.

“Initialization” is selected by default at the “Event” field because initial-

ization triggers the user program.

The remaining options are used to create the user program that is executed
by the startup event, and the program is displayed in the Program box. For
instructions, refer to Chapter 12, “5000LC Programming” beginning on
page 177.

The [Get Macro] button is used to import a macro program. A macro is a

file containing a pre-defined program. For information on macros, refer to
Chapter 13, “5000LC Macros” on page 201.

Standard or If you select Compact, Standard, or Standard w/telephone interface as the

CCU type, the following field appears.
Compact CCU

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 47

Central Controller (CCU) Job Parameters

Parameters Click , and select from the drop-down list each parameter that you want
to set up for the Standard or Compact CCU. The following parameters are
available:

• Comms/Telephone (set up communications and telephone interfaces)

• LED Notification (set up gangs to notify an integrated control system
of LED status)
• Switch/LED Invert (set up global parameters for the job).
• Switch Notification (set up gangs to notify an integrated control system
of switch actions)
• Vacation Mode (define a vacation mode)

After you select a parameter, an [Edit ...] button becomes available below
the field. Click the [Edit ...] button to open a dialog box and select or enter
options for the parameter, as described in the following sections.

Comms/Telephone Select the Comms/Telephone parameter to set up the communications

interface for communications with the CCU and to set up the telephone
interface if you are using the Standard CCU with telephone interface.

Communications Interface The communications interface is used to transfer data to the CCU.

Protocol Click , and select the type of protocol you will be using to communi-
cate with the CCU, either ASCII or CRC (cyclic redundancy check). CRC
verifies that no errors occurred with the data transfer but takes a bit longer.

Telephone Interface You need to set up the telephone interface if you are using the Standard
CCU with telephone interface (modem).

48 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Job Parameters Central Controller (CCU)

Security Enabled Select this option if you want to set up a security code for the modem to
prevent unauthorized access.

Security Code If security is enabled (above), enter the code that will be required to access
the modem (e.g., 149). A simple code is recommended.

Answer on Ring # Enter the number of rings at which you want the modem to answer.

Answer Mode The modem can answer in either “modem mode” or “voice mode.” Voice
mode is primarily used to give a homeowner the ability to turn on or off
one or more switches by telephone. Modem mode is required for uploads,
downloads, and diagnostics.

NOTE ☞ When in voice mode, you can enter a code to change to modem mode. How-
ever, you cannot change from modem mode to voice mode. For this reason, if
you want to use voice mode at any time, you should set the “Answer Mode” to
“Voice.”

In voice mode, if you have specified a security code, the modem answers
and waits to receive the code. If the code is incorrect, it disconnects. After
the code is entered correctly (or if there is no code) the modem responds
“LiteTouch 2000, ready.” In voice mode, you can specify any of the fol-
lowing actions:

• To turn on a switch: press * and enter the 3-digit number that identifies
a switch (e.g., *122). Only switches with a 3-digit numeric code can be
accessed.
• To turn off a switch: press # and the 3-digit number that identifies a
switch (e.g., #122). Only switches with a 3-digit numeric code can be
accessed.
• To change to modem mode while in voice mode, enter *009.
• To change to voice mode if you set up the program file in modem
mode, you must change the “Answer Mode” option to “Voice” and
upload the program file to the CCU again.

Click [OK] to save the information and close the dialog box when you are
finished.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 49

Central Controller (CCU) Job Parameters

LED Notification (Used with system integration) Select the LED Notification parameter if the
job’s LiteTouch system is integrated with other control systems that
require notification of switch LED status from the LiteTouch system.

Available gangs are listed in the left-hand box. Click the gangs that you
want to select to send their switch or switches’ LED status to another con-
trol system. To select several consecutive gangs, press and hold <Shift>,
then click the first and last gangs in the group you want to select. To select
several non-consecutive gangs, press and hold <Ctrl>, then click each
gang that you want to select. The number of gangs you selected appears in
the text box at the bottom of the window.

After you have selected the gangs, click [>] to move the selected gangs to
the right-hand box. Click [>>] to move all gangs from the left-hand box
to the right-hand box.

To “deselect” or move gangs back to the left-hand box, select the gang or
gangs to move, and then click [<]. Click [<<] to move all gangs from the
right-hand box to the left-hand box.

Click [OK] to save the information and close the dialog box when you are
finished.

50 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Job Parameters Central Controller (CCU)

Switch/LED Invert Unlike the 5000LC, which allows parameters to be set for each switch,
timer, and so on, a Standard/Compact CCU, uses global parameters for all
switches, timers, and so on. Select Switch/LED Invert to set up global
parameters for the CCU such as the LED invert options, dimmer options,
timer options, and so on.

LED Invert Options LED action is defined by function. Select each function for which you
want to reverse the LED action.

Dimmer Options Enter the parameters for the following dimmer options:

Ramp Time Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that it will take to go from the mini-
mum dim value to the maximum dim value (and vice versa) when a button
is pressed and held. This value is used for all dimmers in the system.

Minimum Turn On Enter the minimum turn on value for a load. This value is used for all dim-
mers in the system.

Timed Option Select whether you want the Timed Toggle function to act as a Timed Tog-
gle or a Timed On function. The Timed function uses a timer to specify the
duration that the load group will remain on. When the switch is activated,
it turns on the load group and the timer, and then the load group automati-
cally turns off after the specified duration.

Timed Toggle Select this option if you want the load group to turn off if the user presses
the button again while the load group is still on.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 51

Central Controller (CCU) Job Parameters

Timed On Select this option if you want the timer to reset and the load group to
remain on for the full duration again if the user presses the button again
while the load group is still activated.

Scene Option Select whether you want the Scene Preset Toggle function to act as a
Scene Toggle or a Scene On function. The Scene Preset Toggle function is
used to turn a scene on (and off if “Scene Toggle” is selected) at preset
levels using specified fade on and fade off times.

Scene Toggle Select this option for the Scene Preset Toggle function if you want to use
the same switch to turn the scene on and off. On the first button press, the
scene fades on to scene levels. On the second press, it fades off.

Scene On Select this option for the Scene Preset Toggle function if you want one
switch used to turn the scene on and a different switch used to turn the
scene off.

Scene Preset Levels Select whether you want the scene preset levels for the Scene Preset Tog-
(Standard CCU Only) gle function to be locked or unlocked.

Locked Select this option to lock the scene preset levels so that the user cannot
change them.

Unlocked Select this option to unlock the scene preset levels so that the user can
change them. The user can record the current settings of the scene by hold-
ing the switch in for more than 4 seconds. The newly recorded settings
become the presets for the scene.

NOTE ☞ The Compact CCU has a switch on the bottom of the cabinet to lock or unlock
scene preset levels.

Interlock Type If you are using a relay module with interlocked relays, select the type of
relay module: 8-Channel or 6-Channel.

Daylight Savings Use this option to turn daylight savings time (DST) on or off for the CCU.
The Standard and Compact CCUs do not adjust automatically to DST. If
you select “On,” the CCU will be set to DST and will not change back to
standard time unless you change the parameter to “Off.” You may want to
leave this setting on or off and simply keep the time difference in mind
when setting up timers. Otherwise, you will have to change the setting
each time DST starts and ends (e.g., in April and October).

Click [OK] to save the information and close the dialog box when you are
finished.

52 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Job Parameters Central Controller (CCU)

Switch Notification (Used with system integration) Select the Switch Notification parameter if
the job’s LiteTouch system is integrated with other control systems that
require notification of switch actions from the LiteTouch system.

Available gangs are listed in the left-hand box. Click the gangs that you
want to select to send their switch or switches’ action to another control
system. To select several consecutive gangs, press and hold <Shift>, then
click the first and last gangs in the group you want to select. To select sev-
eral non-consecutive gangs, press and hold <Ctrl>, then click each gang
that you want to select. The number of gangs you selected appears in the
text box at the bottom of the window.

After you have selected the gangs, click [>] to move the selected gangs to
the right-hand box. Click [>>] to move all gangs from the left-hand box
to the right-hand box.

To “deselect” or move gangs back to the left-hand box, select the gang or
gangs to move, and then click [<]. Click [<<] to move all gangs from the
right-hand box to the left-hand box.

Click [OK] to save the information and close the dialog box when you are
finished.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 53

Central Controller (CCU) Job Parameters

Vacation Mode Select the Vacation Mode parameter to define a vacation mode. When the
Vacation Switch function button is pressed, the vacation mode is activated,
and the specified loads turn on and off in a random pattern to simulate rou-
tine household activities.

You specify a time period and assign loads. The CCU then randomly turns
the loads on and off during the time period. The vacation mode is executed
by pressing the specified button (see “Vacation Switch (Standard/Com-
pact)” on page 132) and is ended by pressing the button again.

Vacation Active Period Use these options to define the active period for the vacation mode.

Start Enter the time that the active period will begin. Enter the time in hours and
minutes (HH MM) and select either AM or PM (e.g., 06 30 AM). The
selected loads will begin to turn on and off randomly at this time each day.

End Enter the time that the active period will end. Enter the time in hours and
minutes (HH MM) and select either AM or PM (e.g., 11 30 PM). The
selected loads will all turn off at this time each day.

Assign Loads Assign the loads that are to be turned on and off during the active vacation
period (defined above), as follows.

54 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Job Parameters Central Controller (CCU)

Available loads are listed in the left-hand box. Click the loads that you
want to select to turn on and off while in vacation mode. To select several
consecutive loads, press and hold <Shift>, then click the first and last
loads in the group you want to select. To select several non-consecutive
loads, press and hold <Ctrl>, then click each load that you want to select.
The number of loads you selected appears in the text box at the top of the
window.

After you have selected the loads, click [>] to move the selected loads to
the right-hand box. Click [>>] to move all loads from the left-hand box to
the right-hand box.

To “deselect” or move loads back to the left-hand box, select the load or
loads to move, and then click [<]. Click [<<] to move all loads from the
right-hand box to the left-hand box.

Click [OK] to save the information and close the dialog box when you are
finished.

CCU Function If you change the CCU for an existing job (see “Central Controller
(CCU)” on page 45), the functions and programming are converted to be
Conversion compatible with the selected CCU. (If functions were set up that are not
supported by the new CCU, the unsupported functions are changed to
“None.”) The following tables list the functions supported by each CCU
and show how functions are converted from one type of CCU to another.

Conversion from 5000LC to Standard/Compact CCU

Standard/Compact Standard/Compact
5000LC Multiple Load Single Load
Dimmer Dimmer (Master) Dimmer (Single)
On Master On Master On
Off Master Off Master Off
Toggle (On) Master Off Toggle Toggle (Single)
Toggle (Off) Master Off Toggle Toggle (Single)
Scene Scene Preset Toggle Scene Preset Toggle
Scene On Scene Preset Toggle Scene Preset Toggle
Timed Toggle Timed Toggle Timed Toggle
Timed On Timed Toggle Timed Toggle
Motion Control *None* *None*
Open *None* *None*
Close *None* *None*

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 55

Job Description/Statistics Job Parameters

Conversion from 5000LC to Standard/Compact CCU (Continued)

Standard/Compact Standard/Compact
5000LC Multiple Load Single Load
Momentary Momentary (Single) Momentary (Single)
Raise Raise (Single) Raise (Single)
Lower Lower (Single) Lower (Single)
Vacation Vacation Switch Vacation Switch
Switch Pointer *None* *None*
Combination *None* *None*
User *None* *None*

Conversion from Standard/Compact to 5000LC CCU

Standard/Compact 5000LC
Dimmer (Single) Dimmer
Dimmer (Master) Dimmer
Toggle (Single) Toggle (On)
Scene Preset Toggle Scene
Master On On
Master Off Off
Master Off Toggle Toggle (Off)
Timed Toggle Timed Toggle
Timed Flash *None*
Open/Close *None*
Momentary (Single) Momentary
Raise (Single) Raise
Lower (Single) Lower
Vacation Switch Vacation

Job Description/Statistics
You can use the Job Description box to enter any information that may be
useful to you, including descriptions, contact names, date of last update,
date that lighting control components were ordered, and so on. Maximum
description length is 255 characters (approximately 4 lines). If you enter
more than 255 characters, an error message will appear when you attempt

56 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Job Parameters Job Description/Statistics

to save the file. Click [OK] to close the message, shorten the description,
and save again.

The Statistics box shows the actual number of loads, modules, enclosures,
keypads, and timers that were added to the job. This information can be
useful to verify power supply size, order component quantities, and so on.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 57

Job Description/Statistics Job Parameters

Notes

58 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Fixtures 6

This chapter provides information on the functions performed in the Fix-

tures view. You use the Fixtures view to enter the fixtures for a job. The
fixture list is a master list for the current project database file and all of the
fixtures listed are available to all jobs in the database. At any time (and
from any job) you can add or delete fixtures, and the fixture list is updated
for all jobs in the database.

After you enter the name and other information for a fixture, it is added to
the drop-down list in the “Fixture” field in the Loads view. In the Loads
view, each time you select a fixture from the drop-down list, the fixture
name, load type, watts, and function are added automatically to the table.

NOTE ☞ You can import a fixture list from another project database file. Refer to
“Import Fixtures” on page 217 for more information. You can also add fixtures
to the project database while adding loads in the Loads view. Fixtures added in
the Loads view become part of the fixture list. Refer to “Edit a Fixture” on
page 61 for more information.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 59

 Fixtures

Click [Fixtures] on the view selection bar to display the Fixtures view.

Sorting the List As a default, the list of fixtures is sorted by fixture name. To change the
order in which the list is sorted, click a column heading (e.g., Name, Load
Type, etc.) to sort alphabetically or numerically by the items in the col-
umn. Click once to sort in ascending order; click again to sort in descend-
ing order.

Saving the Database When creating or editing a fixture list, you should save your work periodi-
cally. Click on the toolbar, or select Save from the File menu.

60 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Fixtures Add a Fixture

Add a Fixture
Click [Add Fixture] to add a new fixture to the list. A line is added to the
list with a default fixture name. Click in each table cell to enter or select
the following information.

Fixture Type Click in the cell and type a name or identifier for the fixture (typically ref-
erenced on the blueprint or fixture schedule).

Load Type Double-click in the cell to display a drop-down arrow. Click and select
the load type for the fixture. You can define any type of load including low
voltage. The load type identifies the type of module that will be used to
control the fixture.

Watts Click in the cell and type the power rating in watts for the fixture. Enter
the wattage for one device only.

Default Module Function Double-click in the cell to display a drop-down arrow. Click and select
the default function the module will use to control the load.

Edit a Fixture
Do the following to edit fixture information:

1. If necessary, find the fixture you want to edit using the vertical scroll
bar on the right side of the window.

2. Double-click in the cell you want to edit to display a drop-down arrow

or to highlight the text.

3. Type over the text, or click and make a selection from the drop-
down list.

4. Click in another cell to update the information.

NOTE ☞ If you change a fixture’s wattage, load type, or default function, you are given
a choice to update the information for any load using the information (which
may cause the load to be unassigned) or to leave all loads as they are.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 61

Delete a Fixture Fixtures

NOTE ☞ Remember that when you make changes to a fixture, you are changing the fix-
ture for all jobs in the database. If you have multiple jobs in the database, make
sure the fixture is not being used with its current settings by another job before
you change any of the settings. If other jobs may be affected, you should add a
new fixture rather than edit an existing one.

Delete a Fixture
Do the following to delete a fixture or fixtures from the fixture list:

1. Click the fixture that you want to delete to select it. To select several
consecutive fixtures, press and hold <Shift>, then click the first and
last fixtures in the group you want to select. To select several non-con-
secutive fixtures, press and hold <Ctrl>, then click each fixture that
you want to select.

2. Click [Delete Fixture(s)]. All selected fixtures are removed from the
list.

NOTE ☞ If your project database file contains multiple jobs, before deleting a fixture
make sure that it is not used in any other job.

Print a Fixture Schedule

A fixture schedule is a report that lists the fixtures shown in the Fixtures
view. The fixtures are listed in the order they appear on the screen, and fix-
tures for all jobs in the current project database file are listed.

To print a fixture schedule, click on the toolbar, or select Print from

the File menu. Click on the toolbar, or select Print Preview from the
File menu, to view the report before printing it.

When you select Print, a standard Windows Print dialog box is displayed.
If necessary, select the printer and specify the page range and number of
copies. Click [OK] to print the schedule.

62 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Loads 7

This chapter provides information on the functions performed in the Loads

view. You use the Loads view to list and describe the electrical devices to
be controlled by the LiteTouch system. After you have added loads to the
job, assign the loads as follows:

• Assign loads to modules in the Enclosures view

• Assign loads to buttons on the keypads in the Stations view
• Assign loads to timers in the Timers view

Click [Loads] on the view selection bar to display the Loads view.

NOTE ☞ Angle brackets around the load type, function, or wattage data indicate that
the load is using the default value for the fixture. If no angle brackets appear

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 63

Add a Load Loads

around the data, the default value has been overridden. Also, if the load type,
function, or wattage data for a load assigned to a module are changed, the
new information is verified to make sure it is compatible with the module. A
prompt appears to allow you to accept or reject the change.

Adjust Column Widths You can adjust column widths to accommodate the data and fit your com-
puter monitor. Move the mouse pointer to the space between column head-
ings (e.g., Load Number, Load Type, Module Function, Area, etc.). The
pointer changes to a double arrow. Click and hold down the mouse button.
A column separator line appears. Continue to hold the mouse button and
drag the separator line to expand or contract the width of the column. You
can drag the line all the way to the left to close up a column that you don’t
need. The changes are saved when you exit the program.

Sort the List As a default, the load list is unsorted. To sort the list, click a column head-
ing to sort alphabetically or numerically by the items in the column. Click
once to sort in ascending order; click again to sort in descending order.

Auto-Complete an Entry In cells with drop-down lists, you can type the first letter of a possible
entry, and the first item starting with that letter in the drop-down list is
entered in the cell. If necessary, type a second or third letter until the cor-
rect item is entered.

Save the Database When creating or editing a load list, you should save your work periodi-
cally. Click on the toolbar, or select Save from the File menu.

Add a Load
Do the following to add loads to a job:

1. In the “Enclosure Location” box (above the list), click at the “Cur-
rent” field, and from the drop-down list, select a location for the loads
you are going to enter.

The list includes the locations you added in the Job Parameters view
(see “Enclosure Locations” on page 45). LiteWare 3.6 uses the

64 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Loads Add a Load

selected location to automatically assign the loads to enclosures and

modules in the same location.

You can select “All” as the location. This option is generally used to
view all loads in all locations when viewing or editing the load list.

You can select “Unassigned” as a temporary location for any loads that
you are not ready to assign to a location. Refer to “Change Location”
on page 68 for information on changing a load’s location. You can also
use “Unassigned” for any load that you do not want to assign to a spe-
cific location.

2. Click [Add Load] to add a new load to the list. A default load number is
assigned, and the rest of the cells are unassigned. If you already have
loads listed, a line is added to the list and the information from the pre-
vious line is copied into it so you can simply change any information
that is different. Click in each table cell to enter or select the required
parameter, as described below.

3. If you attempt to set up a load configuration with incompatible param-

eters, a warning message similar to the following is displayed.

Click [Yes] if you want to assign the parameter anyway; click [No] if
you want to cancel the assignment.

4. When you have finished entering all loads for the selected location,
save the file, then select the next location for which you want to enter
loads (as described in step 1), and add the loads for that location.

Load Number Enter a number to identify the load (normally the three-digit number from
the blueprint). A default load number is entered when you click [Add Load]
with an “L” prefix and the next consecutive number. You can use any pre-
fix (e.g., “Load,” “LD,” etc.). Type the load number with the prefix you
want to use (e.g. “Load101”), and when you add the next load your prefix
will be used with the next consecutive number as the default.

Address (Load address) An address is assigned to each load while auto-assigning

or manually assigning loads (Enclosure view). The address assigned to the

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 65

Add a Load Loads

load is shown here for reference. If addresses have not been assigned,
“U/A” is displayed.

Fixture Type Double-click in the cell to display a drop-down arrow. If you have already
added fixtures (see Chapter 6, “Fixtures”), click and select the fixture
for the load. You can define any type of load, including low voltage. Press
the <Tab> key or click in another cell. The load type, watts, and function
are entered automatically based on the information from the fixture list.

If you have not added fixtures, or if you want to add a new fixture, enter a
new name in the “Fixture Name” cell and enter the applicable information
in the “Load Type,” “Watts,” and “Module Function” cells (as described
below). The fixture you define will be added to the fixture list (in the Fix-
tures view) and to the drop-down list in the Loads view.

Load Type To change the default, double-click in the cell to display a drop-down
arrow. Click and select the load type for the fixture. The load type
identifies the type of module that will be used to control the fixture.

NOTE ☞ In LiteWare 3.6, low voltage loads are assigned automatically and handled in
the same manner as regular loads.

Watts To change the default, click in the cell and type the power rating for the
fixture in watts. Enter the wattage for one device only.

Qty Click in the cell and type the quantity of the fixture on the circuit.

Total Watts The total wattage (watts ∗ the quantity) for the load is displayed in this
cell.

Module Function To change the default, double-click in the cell to display a drop-down
arrow. Click and select the function the module will use to control the
load.

NOTE ☞ When you change the default load type, function, or wattage, the angle brack-
ets are removed so you can tell that the default value has been changed.

Floor Plan This is an optional field. You can enter a floor plan location to describe a
section of the building or the floor on which the load will be located. This
is different from the enclosure location selected in the “Enclosure Loca-
tion, Current” field. You can use a floor plan location in connection with
an “Area” entry (see below) to more precisely describe the location of each
load in the design job.

66 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Loads Add a Load

Double-click in the cell and type a floor plan description. You can use any
type of description (e.g., second floor, east wing, pool area, etc.). As you
enter floor plan descriptions, they are added to the drop-down list. If you
have entered other floor plan descriptions, you can click and select one
from the list.

Area This is an optional field. You can enter an area location to describe the spe-
cific area or room in which the load will be located. You can use area loca-
tions in connection with a “Floor Plan” entry (see above) to more precisely
describe the location of each load in the design job.

Double-click in the cell and type an area description (e.g., hallway, master
bath, garden, driveway, etc.). As you enter area descriptions, they are
added to the drop-down list. If you have entered other area descriptions,
you can click and select one from the list.

Load Description Double-click in the cell and type a description of the type of load (down-
lights, reading downlights, ocean flood, exhaust fan, shower light, etc.). As
you enter load descriptions, they are added to the drop-down list. If you
have entered other load descriptions, you can click and select one from
the list.

Enclosure Location The enclosure location to which each load is assigned is displayed in this
column. This is particularly useful if you selected “All” as the current
location. Enclosure locations are created in the Job Parameters view.

Load Position The enclosure, module position, and load position of each assigned load is
displayed in this column. If a load is not assigned, “U/A” is displayed.

Voltage To change the voltage for a load, double click in the Voltage cell, click ,
and select the voltage.

An entry in the “Voltage” column enclosed in brackets (e.g., <120>) indi-

cates that the voltage was entered by the system, reflecting the voltage
indicated in Job Parameters for the job. If the voltage is changed for the
job, the value in brackets changes to match the new setting (e.g., <240>).
A voltage that is entered manually is not enclosed in brackets, and the
value is not changed by the system even if the voltage in Job Parameters is
changed for the job.

Arc Fault To indicate that the load is an arc fault, double-click in the Arc Fault cell,
click , and select Yes. This will group all arc fault type loads together so
that they can be manually assigned to modules in order to minimize the
number of arc fault breakers needed for the job.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 67

Edit a Load Loads

Edit a Load
Do the following to edit a load’s information:

1. In the “Enclosure Location” box (above the list), click at the “Cur-
rent” field, and from the drop-down list, select the location of the
load(s) you want to edit. All loads assigned to the selected location are
listed. Select “All” to list all loads in all locations. Select “Unassigned”
to list only loads that were not assigned to a specific location. (Refer to
“Change Location” below for information on changing a load or loads
location.)

2. If necessary, find the load that you want to edit using the vertical scroll
bar on the right side of the window.

3. Type over the text, or click and make a selection from a drop-down
list.

4. Click in another cell to update the information.

NOTE ☞ If you modify a load already assigned to a module, it is automatically reas-

signed to a module based on the new requirements. If an assignment cannot be
made, a message is displayed, and you can cancel the change if desired.

Change Enclosure locations are added in the Job Parameters view (see “Enclosure
Locations” on page 45). When you add loads in the Loads view, you select
Location one of the locations for the loads from the drop-down list at the “Current”
field in the “Enclosure Location” box. LiteWare 3.6 uses the selected loca-
tion to automatically assign the loads to enclosures and modules in the
same location. You can change the location of a load or loads at any time.

You might change the location of a load for any of the following reasons:

• You have too many loads of one type in one location and module
vacancies at another location.
• One or more loads were added in the wrong location.

68 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Loads Delete a Load

• There were changes to the design.

• Loads were added to the “All” or “Unassigned” location categories
temporarily and need to be assigned.

Do the following to change the location of a load or loads:

1. Click at the “Current” field, and select the current location of the
loads you want to move. Select “All” to view all loads in all locations.

2. In the load list, click to select the load or loads you want to move.

To select several consecutive loads, press and hold <Shift>, then click
the first and last load in the group you want to select. To select several
non-consecutive loads, press and hold <Ctrl>, then click each load
that you want to select.

3. At the “Change To” field, click and, from the drop-down list, select
the location to which you want to move the selected loads.

You can select “All” as the location. However, this option is generally
used for viewing or editing the load list to view all loads in all loca-
tions.

NOTE ☞ You can select the “Unassigned” location if you want to remove a load from a
location but do not yet know where to assign it.

4. Click [Change To] to change the location of the selected loads to the
location shown in the “Change To” field.

Delete a Load
Do the following to delete a load or loads from the load list:

1. Click the load that you want to delete to select it. To select several con-
secutive loads, press and hold <Shift>, then click the first and last
loads in the group you want to select. To select several non-consecu-
tive loads, press and hold <Ctrl>, then click each load that you want
to select.

2. Click [Delete Load(s)]. All selected loads are removed from the list.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 69

Print a Load Schedule Loads

NOTE ☞ If you remove loads that have been assigned to modules, you may want to run
auto-assign again to maintain optimal load assignments (refer to “Assign Loads
(Auto-Assign)” on page 75 for information).

Print a Load Schedule

A load schedule is a report that lists the loads shown in the Loads view.
The loads are listed in the order they appear on the screen.

To print a load schedule, select the location of the loads for which you
want to print a schedule, and click on the toolbar, or select Print from
the File menu. Click on the toolbar, or select Print Preview from the
File menu, to view the report before printing it.

When you select Print, a standard Windows Print dialog box is displayed.
If necessary, select the printer and specify the page range and number of
copies. Click [OK] to print the schedule.

NOTE ☞ The printed load schedule shows the Loads view “Floor Plan” and “Area”
entries in one column labeled “Floor/Area.” If both entries were made in the
Loads view, they are separated by a backslash (/) in the load schedule. If only
the “Area” entry was made, it is preceded by a backslash in the load schedule.

70 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Enclosures 8

This chapter provides information on the functions performed in the

Enclosures view. After you add loads to a job in the Loads view, you use
the Enclosures view to add enclosures and modules and to assign loads to
modules. Normally, you will have LiteWare 3.6 “auto-assign” loads and
then make changes to the configuration manually as required.

Auto-Assign Loads Most loads can be assigned automatically in LiteWare 3.6. However, some
modules and their associated loads may require manual assignment.

NOTE ☞ Some loads may be rejected during assignment to modules due to error check-
ing. Loads are rejected if they exceed the wattage rating of the circuit, module,
or line feed or if the load voltage is too low for the module type. These loads
can be reassigned during the next auto-assignment. Unassigned loads show a
status of “U/A” in the Load and Programming Summary pane (in the ID col-
umn) until they are reassigned. However, “zero watt loads” are ignored during
error checking as these loads must be manually assigned (see “Program File
Import Limitations” on page 222 for details on zero watt loads).

LiteWare 3.6’s auto-assignment (Assign Loads function) assigns loads in

the most cost-effective configuration possible. During auto-assignment,
LiteWare 3.6 reviews the load list for each location and determines which
modules are needed. After it has identified the required modules, LiteWare
3.6 determines how many enclosures are needed and places the modules
inside the enclosures. It then assigns the appropriate loads to each module
and adds required power supplies.

NOTE ☞ The voltage selection in the Job Parameters view (see “Line Voltage” on
page 44) determines the default voltage of unassigned loads. LiteWare assigns
loads based on their line voltages.

You should use the Assign Loads function initially to assign the load list
for each location. You can also use it later as additions or changes are
made to the load list to assign any unassigned loads.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 71

 Enclosures

NOTE ☞ LiteWare 3.6 cannot automatically assign some loads. A prompt appears to
inform you of any loads that cannot be assigned so that you can assign the
loads manually (see “Assign Loads (Auto-Assign)” on page 75).

LiteWare 3.6’s auto-assignment of loads is available in two ways:

• Click [Assign Loads] after you open the Enclosures view. Refer to
“Assign Loads (Auto-Assign)” on page 75 for information.
• Respond to the Unassigned Loads prompt that appears (shown below)
if there are any unassigned loads in the current location when you click
[Enclosures] on the view selection bar or when you select a different
“current” location.

Click [Yes] if you want LiteWare 3.6 to auto-assign the loads. The Assign-
ment Options dialog box appears (see “Assign Loads (Auto-Assign)” on
page 75 for information).

Select [No] if you want LiteWare 3.6 to auto-assign the loads later or if you
plan to assign them manually.

The Enclosures view is displayed for the current location. For information
on selecting a different location, refer to “Location Functions” on page 77.

Manually Assign Loads If desired, you can manually add all enclosures, modules and power sup-
plies and manually assign all loads to modules. More commonly, you will
manually edit LiteWare 3.6’s automatically assigned configuration.
Because auto-assignment is based on information from the load list, you
may need to add some modules manually or change some auto-assigned
modules to modules that you would prefer to use.

You will need to make manual assignments in the following cases:

Data input modules

A data input module has switch inputs rather than loads, and switch
inputs cannot be auto-assigned. You can add a data input module to a
job in either the Enclosures view or the Stations view. Then you con-
figure the data input module and its inputs in the Stations view.

72 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Enclosures

Older model 6-channel relays and dimmers

Older model fluorescent dimmers
LiteWare 3.6 only selects standard model dimmers and relays during
auto-assignment. Older models are listed in the “Available Modules”
drop-down list and must be selected manually.

Dual 20 amp dimmers

Dual 20 amp dimmer modules are used in heavy load areas or reduced
noise situations because of their heavy-duty chokes and traces. This
model is included in the “Available Modules” drop-down list and must
be selected manually.

Other specialty modules

If you need to add a module to the job that is not listed in the “Avail-
able Modules” drop-down list, you will need to identify it as an
“Unknown Module,” a selection in the drop-down list. Refer to “Add a
Module or Power Supply” on page 84 for information.

Arc fault loads

To minimize the number of arc fault breakers needed, all arc fault des-
ignated loads must be manually assigned.

If LiteWare 3.6 is unable to assign a load in the load list during an auto-
assignment, a message informs you and identifies the load(s). Any unas-
signed loads remain on an “unassigned loads” list (NOT in the “unas-
signed” location) until they are assigned.

Refer to “Add a Module or Power Supply” on page 84 for information on

manually adding a module, and refer to “Edit a Module” on page 88 for
information on substituting a module, manually assigning loads, and mak-
ing other module related changes.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 73

Enclosures View Enclosures

Enclosures View
Click [Enclosures] on the view selection bar to display the Enclosures view,
shown below with a sample configuration.

After loads have been assigned, the Enclosures view graphically displays
the enclosures, modules, and power supplies in the selected location (or
“All” locations). An enclosure appears as a gray box with the enclosure
name and location above it. Assigned modules or power supplies appear in
the enclosure positions to which they are assigned (e.g., 1 through 4).

NOTE ☞ It is an NEC code violation to place 277 volt modules in the same enclosure as
120 or 240 volt modules. LiteWare will not allow modules with different volt-
age ratings to be placed in the same enclosure.

74 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Enclosures Assign Loads (Auto-Assign)

Assign Loads (Auto-Assign)

To have LiteWare 3.6 automatically add enclosures and modules and
assign loads, do one of the following:

• Click [Yes] at the Unassigned Loads prompt (refer to “Auto-Assign

Loads” on page 71) that appears if there are any unassigned loads in the
current location when you click [Enclosures] on the view selection bar,
or when you select a different “current” location (refer to “Location
Functions” on page 77).
• Click [Assign Loads] after you open the Enclosures view.

The Assignment Options dialog box is displayed.

Select Location Click All Locations to auto-assign loads for all locations. Click Current
Location Only to auto-assign loads only to the current location.

NOTE ☞ If you want to auto-assign loads to a different “current location only,” click
[Cancel] to cancel the auto-assignment, select a different location, and then
click [Assign Loads] to auto-assign loads in the location. Refer to “Location
Functions” on page 77 for information on changing the current location.

Select Loads to Assign Click All Loads to unassign any loads that have been assigned to the
selected location(s) and then auto-assign all loads to the selected loca-
tion(s). Click Unassigned Loads Only to auto-assign only loads that have
not been assigned. Generally, if there are several unassigned loads for the
selected location, you should select “All Loads.” The auto-assignment is
most efficient when assigning all loads to a location.

Click [OK]. Enclosures are added, modules and power supplies are added
to enclosures, and loads are assigned to the modules in the most cost-
effective configuration.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 75

Assign Loads (Auto-Assign) Enclosures

NOTE ☞ In LiteWare 3.6, low voltage loads are assigned automatically and handled in
the same manner as regular loads.

If there are loads that cannot be assigned, the following prompt is dis-
played.

If there are any arc fault designated loads, the following prompt is dis-
played.

You can view all unassigned loads from the Add Module or Edit Module
dialog box. For information on assigning loads manually, refer to “Add a
Module or Power Supply” on page 84 or “Edit a Module” on page 88.

You do not have to assign the loads immediately, but the “Unassigned
Loads” message is displayed each time you open the Enclosures view until
the unassigned loads are assigned.

NOTE ☞ The auto-assignment process takes a considerable length of time if several dim-
ming loads (more than 150) are entered in the loads list in the same location.
Auto-assignment time can be shortened by placing the loads in multiple loca-
tions.

Auto-Assign • The 5000LC supports three-digit keypad addresses from 0 to FFF but
only supports physical addresses from 0 to FF. Keypad addresses are
Parameters auto-assigned using addresses 01 through 99 before using hexadecimal
addresses. The Standard and Compact CCUs support only keypad
addresses 0 to FF. Zeros can be used if required.

76 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Enclosures Location Functions

• Power supplies are automatically placed in enclosures as they are gen-

erated (at the correct enclosure location). Dual power supplies are used
rather than two single power supplies.
• Auto-assignment will not assign more power to a module than the max-
imum circuit power specified for the job in the Job Parameters view.
• Modules are initially placed in enclosures in the following order: 1)
quads, 2) 8-channel dimmers, 3) 8-channel relays, followed by other
modules.

Location Functions
Locations are added in the Job Parameters view (see “Enclosure Loca-
tions” on page 45). When you add loads in the Loads view, you select one
of the locations for the loads from the drop-down list at the “Current” field
in the “Location” box. When you open the Enclosures view, the Loads
view current location is also the current location in the Enclosures view.
LiteWare 3.6 auto-assigns loads to enclosures and modules by location.

The prompt to auto-assign unassigned loads only appears if there are unas-
signed loads in the current location. You can choose to auto-assign loads
in the current location only or in all locations.

After loads are assigned, only the enclosures and modules for the “cur-
rent” location are displayed in the Enclosures view.

If you want to auto-assign loads to a different location, or if you want to

display the enclosures and modules for a different location, do the follow-
ing to change the current location.

In the “Location” box, click at the “Current” field, and from the drop-
down list, select the location.

Select “All” if you want to view all enclosures or assign loads to all loca-
tions at the same time.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 77

Location Functions Enclosures

Select “Unassigned” to view enclosures or assign loads that were added in

the “unassigned” location. “Unassigned” does not necessarily display all
unassigned loads. There may be unassigned loads in other locations. You
can continue to use an “unassigned” location for modules and loads that
you want to assign to a different location later, or you can move the enclo-
sure and modules to a different location (refer to “Change Location”
below for information).

If there are any unassigned loads in the location you select, the Unassigned
Loads (auto-assign) prompt appears. Refer to “Auto-Assign Loads” on
page 71 for information.

Change Do the following to change the location of an enclosure (and all modules
and power supplies in it):
Location
1. Click at the “Current” field, and select the current location of the
enclosure you want to move. Select “All” to view all enclosures in all
locations.

2. Click the enclosure you want to move to select it (a selected enclosure

has a yellow border).

3. At the “Change To” field, click and, from the drop-down list, select
the location to which you want to move the selected enclosure.

You can select the “Unassigned” location if you want to remove an

enclosure from a location but do not yet know where to locate it.

4. Click [Change To] to change the location of the selected enclosure to

the location shown in the “Change To” field.

NOTE ☞ If more than one enclosure has a vacant position in a location, you can move
modules between enclosures to eliminate an enclosure, if desired. Click the
module you want to move (a selected module has a yellow border), hold down
the mouse button, drag the module into the desired position in the other enclo-
sure, then release the mouse button.

78 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Enclosures Estimate Power

Estimate Power
When you set up the job parameters (see Chapter 5, “Job Parameters”),
you enter an estimated number of keypads and an estimated average num-
ber of buttons per keypad. LiteWare uses this information to determine the
number of power supplies you will need. After you have added enclosures,
modules, and stations to the job, you can click [Estimate Power] to add a
more accurate number of power supplies to the job. If no additional power
supplies are required, they will not be added.

Enclosure Functions
There are two types of enclosures in two sizes:

• 2- or 4-module capacity surface mount

• 2- or 4-module capacity recessed mount

Each type of enclosure is graphically illustrated in the Enclosures view.

For example, in the following illustration, enclosures 4 and 6 are recessed
mount and enclosures 5 and 7 are surface mount.

You can also determine the enclosure type at the “Enclosure” field in the
Edit Enclosure dialog box (see “Edit an Enclosure” on page 80).

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 79

Enclosure Functions Enclosures

NOTE ☞ A SatiLite keypad (see “SatiLite Keypad” on page 3) is classified as both a key-
pad and a module. For this reason, it is shown in the Enclosures view (as a
“SatiLite Enclosure”) as well as the Stations view.

Add an During auto-assignment, LiteWare 3.6 adds any required enclosures to the
selected location. You normally only need to add an enclosure if you are
Enclosure manually adding modules or other components.

To add an enclosure, click the [Add Enclosure] button, or right-click any-

where in the Enclosures view, and select Add Enclosure from the shortcut
menu.

The following dialog box is displayed.

Name Type a name for the enclosure or accept the default.

Enclosure Click and select the type of enclosure. Refer to page 79 for informa-
tion on the different types of enclosures.

Click [OK] to add the enclosure to the Enclosures view.

Edit an During auto-assignment, LiteWare 3.6 adds any required enclosures to the
selected location. Each added enclosure has a default name and is the
Enclosure default enclosure type (4-module enclosure surface mount). Use the Edit
Enclosure function to change the enclosure name and/or the model or size
of the enclosure.

80 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Enclosures Enclosure Functions

To edit an enclosure, right-click the enclosure that you want to edit (a

selected enclosure has a yellow border), and select Edit from the shortcut
menu. The following dialog box is displayed.

Name Delete or type over the default name to enter a new name. Each enclosure
in a job must have a unique name.

Enclosure To change the enclosure type, click and select a different model. Refer
to page 79 for more information.

Click [OK] to change the enclosure.

Delete an To delete one enclosure from a job, right-click the enclosure that you want
to delete (but do not click on a module). A selected enclosure has a yellow
Enclosure border. Select Delete from the shortcut menu to delete the enclosure. The
enclosure is deleted and any modules that were in the enclosure are moved
to unassigned positions in the Enclosures view (refer to “Module Func-
tions” on page 83 for information on moving a module into an enclosure).

To select multiple enclosures to delete, hold down the <Ctrl> key and
click on each enclosure. Then right-click and select Delete to delete all
selected enclosures.

To delete all enclosures in a location or in all locations, click the [Delete

All] button. The following dialog box is displayed.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 81

Enclosure Functions Enclosures

Select Location Click All Locations to delete enclosures in all locations. Click Current
Location Only to delete all enclosures in the current location only.

Select Items to Delete Click Enclosures Only to delete only the enclosures and leave the modules
(unassigned). Click Both Modules and Enclosures to delete all enclosures
and all modules.

Click [OK] to delete the selected items.

After deleting components, you will need to run auto-assign to reassign

loads to enclosures and modules, or you will need to add enclosures and
modules and assign loads manually. Refer to “Assign Loads (Auto-
Assign)” on page 75, “Add a Module or Power Supply” on page 84, or
“Edit a Module” on page 88.

NOTE ☞ If you delete an enclosure that has modules in it without deleting the modules,
the modules become unassigned and are displayed outside an enclosure. You
can delete the modules or move them to another enclosure. To move a module,
click it (a selected module has a yellow border), hold down the mouse button,
drag the module into the desired position in the other enclosure, then release
the mouse button.

Print an An enclosure schedule is a report that contains a graphic of each enclosure

and its modules and power supplies and lists the loads in each module.
Enclosure
To print an enclosure schedule for a location or locations, select the loca-
Schedule tion of the enclosures for which you want to print a schedule (or select All),
click on the toolbar, or select Print from the File menu. Click on
the toolbar, or select Print Preview from the File menu, to view the report
before printing it.

To print a schedule for one enclosure, right-click on the enclosure and

select Print Enclosure from the shortcut menu.

When you select Print, a standard Windows Print dialog box is displayed.
If necessary, select the printer and specify the page range and number of
copies. Click [OK] to print the schedule.

NOTE ☞ Modules that have more than eight channels (e.g., dual LV relay, etc.) are
printed in a smaller font.

82 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Enclosures Module Functions

Module Functions
To view a list of modules types supported by LiteWare 3.6, right-click any
module (a selected module has a yellow border), and select Edit from the
shortcut menu. The Edit Module dialog box is displayed. At the “Available
Modules” field, click to view the list of supported modules. Note that
“Unknown Module” is included in the list. You can select “Unknown
Module” to manually add a type of module (including a specialty or dis-
continued module) that is not listed. The unknown module is compatible
with any load, regardless of its type, total wattage, or function.

All modules have a similar appearance in the Enclosures view. The type of
module is identified by blue lettering on the module, as follows.

Several types of modules and a power supply are shown on the next page.
Note that module addresses appear in small tabs on the left side of mod-
ules with assigned addresses.

The module on the right (module address 11) is unassigned. Modules that
you add manually without assigning to an enclosure, modules that you
remove from an enclosure, or modules left after an enclosure is deleted,
are displayed in the Enclosures view as unassigned modules.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 83

Module Functions Enclosures

To move a module, click it (a selected module has a yellow border), hold

down the mouse button, and drag the module into the desired position in
the same or another enclosure, then release the mouse button.

NOTE ☞ It is an NEC code violation to place 277 volt modules in the same enclosure as
120 or 240 volt modules. LiteWare will not allow modules with different volt-
age ratings to be placed in the same enclosure.

Add a Module After LiteWare 3.6’s auto-assignment, you may need to add modules that
LiteWare 3.6 could not auto-assign (refer to “Manually Assign Loads” on
or Power page 72 for more information). You can also add modules to enclosures
that you add manually, and you can remove any modules that you do not
Supply want to use and add new modules in their place. (You can also edit mod-
ules; refer to “Edit a Module” on page 88).

NOTE ☞ When you import a program file that was downloaded from a CCU, all modules
are classified as “unknown modules,” and all enclosures are classified as 4-mod-
ule enclosures. The program identifies loads but cannot identify the load watt-
age. For this reason, the loads are classified as “zero watt loads.” You must
manually identify the modules and enclosures. You can either manually assign
the loads or add the missing data to the loads list (see “Import 5000LC Pro-
gram File” on page 219 or “Import Standard or Compact Program File” on
page 220 for information on importing program files).

Do the following to add a module or power supply to the job:

84 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Enclosures Module Functions

Click the [Add Module] button, or right-click anywhere in the Enclosures

view, and select Add Module from the shortcut menu. The following dialog
box is displayed.

Available Modules Click and select a type of module from the drop-down list. The list
contains all modules that LiteWare 3.6 can identify. If you need to add a
specialty module that is not on the list, select Unknown Module (see
below).

Module types that cannot be auto-assigned in LiteWare 3.6 include the fol-
lowing:

Data input modules

A data input module has switch inputs rather than loads, and switch
inputs cannot be auto-assigned. You can add a data input module to a
job in either the Enclosures view or the Stations view. Then you con-
figure the data input module and its inputs in the Stations view.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 85

Module Functions Enclosures

Older model 6-channel relays and dimmers

Older model fluorescent dimmers
LiteWare 3.6 only selects standard model dimmers and relays during
auto-assignment. Older models are listed in the “Available Modules”
drop-down list and must be selected manually.

Dual 20 amp dimmers

Dual 20 amp dimmer modules are used in heavy load areas or reduced
noise situations because of their heavy-duty chokes and traces. This
model is included in the “Available Modules” drop-down list and must
be selected manually.

SatiLite keypad/module
A SatiLite keypad (see “SatiLite Keypad” on page 3) is classified as
both a keypad and a module. For this reason, it is shown in both the
Enclosures view and the Stations view. A SatiLite keypad’s module
address and keypad address are the same. You can auto-assign or man-
ually assign a load to a SatiLite. The load to be assigned must be given
the load type of “SatiLite” when you add the load to the loads list. A
SatiLite keypad, which is mounted in a wall box, is shown in the
Enclosures view as follows:

Unknown Module
If you need to add a module to the job that is not listed in the “Avail-
able Modules” drop-down list, select Unknown Module. You can assign
any load to an “unknown module,” regardless of its type, total wattage,
or function.

Place in Enclosure Click and select the enclosure to which the module will be assigned.

Enclosure Position This function is not yet available. When a module is added it is automati-
cally placed in the next available position in the enclosure (see “Auto-
Assign Parameters” on page 76 for assignment order). To move a module,
click it (a selected module has a yellow border), hold down the mouse but-
ton, and drag the module into the desired position in the enclosure, then
release the mouse button.

Part # The part number of the selected module or power supply is displayed.

86 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Enclosures Module Functions

Module Address(es) A “module address” is used by the CCU to identify each module. LiteW-
are 3.6 assigns the address automatically (e.g., 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, etc.).
The address is printed on each module to aid in identification.

NOTE ☞ If you move a module to a different enclosure, its address is NOT automatically
reassigned. The original address can still be used, or it can be changed to more
closely match the sequence in the new location. However, previously used
address numbers cannot be reused. Refer to “Edit a Module” on page 88 for
information on editing an address.

Total Power The power used, available, and total are displayed for reference only. This
information is based on the module rating.

Circuit Power You can enter a name or comment for each line feed on the module, if
applicable. Click and select the number of the line feed. Then, in the
“Name” text box, enter a name or comment to identify the line feed. The
name appears in the text box when the line feed is selected as well as on
printed schedules.

For the selected line feed, the power used, available, and total are dis-
played for reference.

Module Loads The loads that you assign to the new module are listed in this box as you
assign them (from the “Unassigned Loads” list, see below).

Unassigned Loads All loads from the load list that have not been assigned are listed in this
box. To assign a load to the module, click the load to select it, then click
[Assign], or double-click the load. Loads must be assigned one at a time.
The load is added to the “Module Loads” list.

LiteWare 3.6 assigns the next available output address (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,

7, or 8 on an eight-output module), which is shown in the “Output” col-
umn of the “Module Loads” list, to each load as you add it to the module.
If you want to assign a different output to a load, select the load, then, at
the “Output” field, click and select the output number from the drop-
down list.

NOTE ☞ An interlock (open/close) load takes up two adjacent module outputs, one for
the open and one for the close. The 8-channel relay requires those adjacent out-
puts to be either 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, or 7 and 8. The interlocked relay
module requires the adjacent outputs to be 1 and 2, 4 and 5, and 3 and 6.

When you are finished, click [OK] to add the module to the job. Click
on the toolbar, or select Save from the File menu to save the changes to the
database.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 87

Module Functions Enclosures

Edit a Module During auto-assignment, LiteWare 3.6 adds modules to enclosures and
adds loads to the modules based on your load list. You can edit the
assigned loads and other information for any module.

If you move a module to a different enclosure, the module address is NOT

automatically reassigned. The original address can still be used, or you can
use Edit to change the address to more closely match the sequence in the
new location.

To edit a module, right-click any module (a selected module has a yellow

border) and select Edit from the shortcut menu. The Edit Module dialog
box is displayed.

Place in Enclosure You can click and select a new enclosure in which to place the module.

Enclosure Position This function is not yet available. To move a module, click it (a selected
module has a yellow border), hold down the mouse button, and drag the

88 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Enclosures Module Functions

module into the desired position in the same or another enclosure, then
release the mouse button.

Part # The module’s part number is displayed.

Module Address(es) A “module address” is used by the CCU to identify each module. LiteW-
are 3.6 assigns the address automatically (e.g., 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, etc.).
The address is printed on each module to aid in identification. If you move
a module to a different enclosure, its address is NOT automatically reas-
signed. The original address can still be used, or it can be changed to more
closely match the sequence in the new location. However, previously used
address numbers cannot be reused.

To change a module address, click [Edit] and the following dialog box is
displayed.

The address currently assigned to the module is highlighted in the “Avail-

able Addresses” list and shown in the “Addressable Item” box. To change
the address, click a different address in the list and then click [OK].

NOTE ☞ The 5000LC supports three-digit keypad addresses from 0 to FFF but only sup-
ports physical addresses from 0 to FF. Keypad addresses are auto-assigned
using addresses 01 through 99 before using hexadecimal addresses. The Stan-
dard and Compact CCUs support only keypad addresses 0 to FF.

If the module has more than one address (e.g., Dual Low Voltage Relay
module), and you need to change both addresses, select a new address for
the first item (displayed in the “Addressable Item” field). Then click at
the “Addressable Item” field, select the second item from the drop-down
list, and select a new address for it. Click [OK] when you are done.

Total Power The power used, available, and total are displayed for reference only. This
information is based on the module rating.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 89

Module Functions Enclosures

Circuit Power You can enter a name or comment for each line feed on the module, if
applicable. Click and select the number of the line feed. Then, in the
“Name” text box, enter a name or comment to identify the line feed. The
name appears in the text box when the line feed is selected as well as on
printed schedules.

For the selected line feed, the power used, available, and total are dis-
played for reference.

Module Loads This box contains a list of loads that have been assigned to the module.
Each load is assigned an output address (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 on an
eight-output module), which is shown in the “Output” column of the list.
To unassign a load, click the load in the list to select it and click [Unas-
sign]. To unassign all loads, click [Clear All].

Unassigned Loads All loads from the load list that have not been assigned are listed in this
box. To assign a load to the module, click the load to select it, then click
[Assign], or double-click the load. Loads must be assigned one at a time.
The load is added to the “Module Loads” list.

LiteWare 3.6 assigns the next available output to each load as you add it to
the module. If you want to assign a different output to a load, select the
load, then, at the “Output” field, click and select the output number
from the drop-down list.

NOTE ☞ An interlock (open/close) load takes up two adjacent module outputs, one for
the open and one for the close. The 8-channel relay requires those adjacent out-
puts to be either 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, or 7 and 8. The interlocked relay
module requires the adjacent outputs to be 1 and 2, 4 and 5, and 3 and 6.

When you are finished, click [OK] to modify the module. Click on the
toolbar, or select Save from the File menu to save the changes to the data-
base.

Delete a To delete a module or power supply, right-click on the module that you
want to delete. A selected module has a yellow border. Select Delete from
Module the shortcut menu to delete the module. The module is deleted and any
loads that were assigned to it are placed on the unassigned load list.

To select multiple modules to delete, hold down the <Ctrl> key and click
on each module. Then right-click and select Delete to delete all selected
modules.

90 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Enclosures Module Functions

To delete all modules in a location or in all locations, click the [Delete All]
button. The following dialog box is displayed.

Select Location Click All Locations to delete modules in all locations. Click Current Loca-
tion Only to delete all modules in the current location only.

Select Items to Delete Click Modules Only to delete only the modules and leave the enclosures.
Click Both Modules and Enclosures to delete all enclosures and all mod-
ules.

Click [OK] to delete the selected items.

After deleting components, you will need to run auto-assign to reassign

loads to enclosures and modules, or you will need to add enclosures and
modules and assign loads manually. Refer to “Assign Loads (Auto-
Assign)” on page 75, “Add a Module or Power Supply” on page 84, or
“Edit a Module” on page 88.

NOTE ☞ A SatiLite keypad and its enclosure are linked. If you delete one, you delete the
other. If you add one, you add the other.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 91

Module Functions Enclosures

Notes

92 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Stations 9

This chapter provides information on the functions performed in the Sta-

tions view. You use the Stations view to add keypads and to specify the
following:

• Name of keypad
• Button type
• Button and LED colors
• Engraving text on each button
• Function of each switch
• Load group(s) for each switch
• Function programming for each switch when required
Click [Stations] on the view selection bar and the Stations view is dis-
played.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 93

 Stations

The following illustration shows the Stations view with keypads added.

Keypads are arranged in the order they are added. When the database is
saved and reopened, the keypads are sorted alphabetically. Data input
modules are always placed at the end of the group.

Select Keypads and Switches To select a keypad, click in the keypad but not on a button (a selected key-
pad has a yellow border). To select a switch, click on the switch (a selected
switch has a yellow border). When you select a keypad or button, you can
view its settings in the Switch Summary (see next section). You can also
right-click the selected switch or keypad and select Edit, or double-click
on the switch or keypad, to display the Properties dialog box for the item.

94 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations

Show Programmed Click the [Show Programmed] button to graphically display the buttons that
have been programmed in each keypad. Programmed buttons are shaded
diagonally, as shown below.

After you click it, the button changes to [Hide Programmed]; click it to
return to the normal button graphics.

Switch Summary If the Switch Summary is not displayed, you can display it by selecting
Switch Summary from the View menu. The Switch Summary lists all key-
pad switches for the currently selected job. Switches are grouped by key-
pad.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 95

 Stations

If you select a switch, the switch is highlighted in the Switch Summary

list. If you select a keypad, all switches for that keypad are highlighted in
the list.

View Scale

You can change the scale of magnification in the Stations view by sliding
the horizontal bar left for a smaller scale and right for a larger scale. The
new view scale is used until you change it again (even if you change
views, change jobs, or exit and reopen LiteWare). Also, if you select a
switch or keypad, and then change the view scale, the selected keypad
remains visible at all times.

The following illustration shows the smallest scale view.

Data Input Modules In addition to keypads, data input modules that you added in the Enclo-
sures view or the Stations view are displayed. The “buttons” shown on the
data input module directly correspond to the physical inputs on the module
itself. The inputs are programmed in the same manner as the switches on a
keypad.

96 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations

In the illustration below, a dual data input module is shown on the right.

Accurate Graphical The Stations view provides an accurate graphical representation of each
Representation keypad you add. The following illustration includes several variations that
show the style of each keypad series, button colors, cover, LED, and
engraving text. In addition, two-gang keypads are shown graphically, and
each keypad is assigned an address automatically.

NOTE ☞ To save time, you should click [Set Defaults] and set up defaults for each type
of keypad you will be using before adding keypads. Refer to “Set Defaults”
below, for information.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 97

Set Defaults Stations

Set Defaults
Click the [Set Defaults] button to set up default colors for any or all of the
keypad types you will be using. You can change the colors for individual
keypads in the Station Properties dialog box when you add or edit a key-
pad. You can also change the color for individual buttons in the Switch
Properties dialog box (refer to “Edit a Switch” on page 107).

NOTE ☞ You can also set keypad and button defaults, as well as load group defaults
using the “Defaults” option (see “Set Up Job Defaults” on page 26).

The Station Defaults dialog box is displayed.

Station Type Click and select the keypad type for which you want to set defaults
from the drop-down list. All keypads available in LiteWare 3.6 are listed
(stock items).

Face-Plate Color Click and select a default color for the keypad’s face-plate.

Face-Plate Style Click and select a default style for the keypad’s face-plate.

Bezel Color Click and select a default color for the keypad’s bezel.

Button Color Click and select a default color for the buttons.

Text Color Click and select a default color for the engraving text on the buttons.

98 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Add a Keypad

LED Color Click and select a default color for the LEDs on the buttons.

Apply on SetAll You can apply any of the default selections to all of the keypad types in the
job. Click the checkboxes to select each default you want to apply. Then
click [Set All Stations] to apply each selected default to all keypads.

NOTE ☞ If you change all keypads in the job to the same keypad type by selecting the
“Apply on SetAll” checkbox for the “Station Type” option, a prompt appears to
warn you that some button programming may be lost if you change any key-
pad types. Click [Yes] to continue or [No] if you do not want to change all key-
pads to the same type.

Click [OK] to save the keypad defaults and exit the dialog box.

Add a Keypad
To add a keypad, click the [Add Station] button, or right-click anywhere in
the Stations view, and select Add from the shortcut menu. The Station
Properties dialog box is displayed. It contains two tabs, one to configure
the keypad and one to configure the buttons, as described in the following
sections.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 99

Add a Keypad Stations

Station Tab The options in the Station tab are used to configure the keypad. If it is not
already selected, click the Station tab.

Keypad # Enter a number or identifier for the keypad. This number is used to iden-
tify the keypad on the keypad design schedule and is listed above the key-
pad in the Stations view.

Keypad Location Enter the location in which the keypad will be placed. This is listed on the
keypad design schedule and appears above the keypad in the Stations view
(if the scale is large enough to show it).

Keypad Type Click and select the type of keypad from the drop-down list. You can
choose to list the keypad types by name or part number (see below) to
make it easier to find a specific type. For two-gang keypads, select a key-
pad model with 12, 15, or 18 buttons.

View By Select whether you want to sort the list of keypad types by name or by part
number.

Comments (Optional) You can describe the keypad’s configuration and add any spe-
cial instructions or other comments, as required, in this box.

100 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Add a Keypad

NOTE ☞ After you select a keypad type, options that are not applicable to the selected
keypad are greyed.

None Select [None] if the keypad has none of the features to the right (corded,
humid location, wet location, data input, or daylight harvester).

Corded Select this option if the keypad has a corded remote, and the word
“corded” is shown on the keypad.

Center Panel - White Select whether you want the center panel of the keypad to be white or
Center Panel - Black black.

Humid Location Select this option if the keypad will be placed in a humid location, and the
words “humid location” are shown on the keypad.

Wet Location Select this option if the keypad will be placed in a wet location, and the
words “wet location” are shown on the keypad.

Phantom Select this option if you want the keypad to be a “phantom” that does not
appear in the billing list but can be programmed and used as a regular sta-
tion for testing purposes.

Data Input Select this option if the keypad will be a data input keypad.

NOTE ☞ If this option is selected for a Coastal or Metropolitan keypad, the data input
gang can use any of the 256 available addresses. If this option is selected for
an S, H, or E series keypad, the data input gang must have the next higher
address as the S, H, or E series keypad.

Daylight Harvester Select this option if the keypad will be a Daylight Harvester keypad.

NOTE ☞ The DayLight Harvester option is available only on the 5000LC CCU. If you
select the Daylight Harvester option, a line item for a light sensor will be added
to the billing list.

Face-plate

Standard, Premium, Custom Choose whether you want to select from “standard,” “premium,” or “cus-
tom” colors, styles, and bezel colors for the keypad face-plate. The options
available are determined by the keypad type selected.

Color Click and select the face-plate finish from the drop-down list.

Style Click and select the face-plate style from the drop-down list.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 101

Add a Keypad Stations

Bezel Color (Available on Framed S and H series only) Click and select the bezel
color from the drop-down list.

Miscellaneous

Address(es) The address for the keypad is shown. Addresses are assigned by gang. If
there are multiple gangs, an address is shown for each gang.

Width The width of the keypad’s face-plate is shown.

Height The height of the keypad’s face-plate is shown.

Customize Gang Station

Gang If you are adding a gang to the keypad, click and select the type of
gang.

NOTE ☞ If a keypad’s number of gangs results in the keypad becoming a “custom

order,” the keypad type is automatically changed to “Custom Keypad
(Quote).” The keypad is added to the bill of materials as a custom keypad for
which the price will need to be quoted. Custom options are listed in the “Key-
pad Type” drop-down list.

Address When you add a gang to a keypad, LiteWare 3.6 automatically assigns it
the next available address. The address shown in the box applies to the
next gang to be added. Each gang must have a unique address, with up to
256 addresses available for one CCU. LiteWare 3.6 does not allow an
address to be assigned to two keypads. If a keypad is deleted or assigned a
new address, the old address is returned to the list and automatically
assigned to the next keypad added.

NOTE ☞ The 5000LC supports three-digit keypad addresses from 0 to FFF but only sup-
ports physical addresses from 0 to FF. Keypad addresses are auto-assigned
using addresses 01 through 99 before using hexadecimal addresses. The Stan-
dard and Compact CCUs support only keypad addresses 0 to FF.

Backlit Select this option if the gang to be added has the “backlit” feature.

NOTE ☞ Selecting this option does not have an effect on the power supply calculation. If
you want LiteWare to correctly calculate power supplies for Metropolitan back-
lit keypads, you must select a Metropolitan series keypad from the “Station
Type” drop-down list in Job Default Properties (see “Set Up Job Defaults” on
page 26) before auto-assigning loads in the Enclosure view.

102 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Add a Keypad

Backlit Color If you selected the “Backlit” option, above, select whether you want the
backlit color to be blue or green.

Infrared Select this option if the gang to be added has the “infrared” feature.

Add Click [Add] to add a gang to the current keypad with the keypad series,
address, and features selected above.

Update Gang If you need to change the information for an existing gang, select the gang
(click it in the list), change the information at the top of the “Gangs” sec-
tions, then click [Update Gang].

Update Gang/Address To change the information for all gangs in the list, click [Update Gang/
Address].

Delete To delete a gang from the keypad, select the gang to be deleted (click it in
the list), and click [Delete].

Move Up If a keypad has multiple gangs, it is assumed that the gangs will be
Move Down installed in the keypad box from left to right in the order they are listed. To
change the order of the gangs in the list, click the gang to be moved and
click [Move Up] or [Move Down].

Custom Keypad If you set up a custom keypad, when you exit the Station tab, the following
message is displayed to remind you that you must contact LiteTouch for
price and availability. Click [OK] to close the notice. If you don’t want the
notice displayed in the future, select Don’t remind me again before you
click [OK].

Buttons Tab Click the Buttons tab to configure the keypad buttons’ style, colors, and
default function. You can edit a switch, if necessary, to change these
options as well as to add engraving text information, set up function pro-
gramming, and assign loads (refer to “Edit a Switch” on page 107).

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 103

Add a Keypad Stations

Use the following options to specify the style and colors of the keypad’s
buttons. The colors and styles you select are illustrated graphically in the
Stations view for easy reference.

Button Style This is the default button style for the keypad. Click and select a differ-
ent style if necessary. Only compatible button styles are listed. You can
select a different button style for each button in the Switch Properties dia-
log box. Refer to “Edit a Switch” on page 107 for information. If you
select different button styles on a keypad, this field shows “Mixed.”

Button Color Click and select a default color for the buttons. You can select a differ-
ent color for each button in the Switch Properties dialog box. Refer to
“Edit a Switch” on page 107 for information. If you select different button
colors on a keypad, this field shows “Mixed.”

Text Color Click and select the default color for the engraving text on the buttons.
You can select a different color for each button in the Switch Properties
dialog box. Refer to “Edit a Switch” on page 107 for information. If you
select different text colors on a keypad, this field shows “Mixed.”

LED Color Click and select the default color for the LEDs on the buttons. You can
select a different color for each button in the Switch Properties dialog box.

104 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Keypad

Refer to “Edit a Switch” on page 107 for information. If you select differ-
ent LED colors on a keypad, this field shows “Mixed.”

Click [OK] to save the new keypad configuration and exit the dialog box.
Click on the toolbar, or select Save from the File menu to save the
changes to the database.

Edit a Keypad
To edit a keypad, right-click on the keypad that you want to edit (a selected
keypad has a yellow border), and select Edit from the shortcut menu, or
double-click the keypad. The Station Properties dialog box is displayed.
You can edit any option that is not dimmed. Refer to “Add a Keypad” on
page 99 for information on the options.

Copy a Keypad
If you want to add a keypad that is similar to an existing keypad, you can
make a copy of the existing keypad to use as a starting point to create the
new keypad.

Right-click on the keypad to be copied and select Copy from the shortcut
menu. Right-click outside the keypad in the blue background area and
select Paste from the shortcut menu. The new keypad is pasted at the end
of the existing keypads.

The new keypad is assigned the next unique address and given the same
name as the copied keypad with the words “copy of” added. The new key-
pad’s switches have the same programming (switch function, load groups,
etc.) as the original keypad’s switches.

Edit the new keypad and its switches as required.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 105

Delete a Keypad Stations

Delete a Keypad
To delete a keypad, click the keypad (a selected keypad has a yellow bor-
der). Click the [Delete Station] button, or right-click the keypad and select
Delete from the shortcut menu. The following prompt is displayed.

Click [Yes] to delete the keypad or [No] if you do not want the keypad
deleted.

The address used by the keypad becomes available and is automatically

assigned to the next keypad added.

To select multiple keypads for deletion, press and hold the <Ctrl> key
and click each keypad that you want to delete. All selected keypads are
outlined with yellow. Click the [Delete Station] button, or right-click and
select Delete from the shortcut menu. A message asks if you really want to
delete the selected items (the number of items is shown). Click [Yes] to
delete the keypads.

Save Keypad as .JPG Image

You can save an image of a keypad as a .jpg file. You might want to do this
to send the image of a custom keypad to the customer for design approval,
to use the image as a CAD drawing, or to print it for visual confirmation of
a keypad during construction. You could also e-mail the file to the factory
to build a single keypad (rather than sending the entire program file).

To save a keypad image, right-click on the keypad that you want to save (a
selected keypad has a yellow border), and select Save to JPG from the
shortcut menu. The file is saved to the Projects folder (the path cannot be
changed). You can use the settings in Job Default Properties to adjust the
size and compression of the images (refer to “JPG Settings Tab” on
page 29).

106 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

Edit a Switch
When you add a keypad, you specify a default style (type), colors, and
function for the keypad’s buttons (switches). You can change an individual
button’s type, colors, or function, as well as set up any of the following:

• Change the switch name

• Add button engraving text
• Edit button style and colors
• Specify the switch function and complete any required programming
• Create and assign a load group to the switch

To edit a button/switch, right-click on the button (a selected button has a

yellow border), and select Edit from the shortcut menu, or double-click the
button. The Switch Properties dialog box is displayed.

Select options in each tab to configure the switch, as described in the fol-
lowing sections. Click [Apply] at any time to save any changes you have
made. When you have finished editing the switch, click [OK] to save the
information and exit the dialog box.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 107

Edit a Switch Stations

NOTE ☞ You can program one button on SatiLite two-button keypads. A one-button
SatiLite keypad contains only a simple dimmer switch and is not programmable.
On a two-button SatiLite keypad, the upper button is a simple dimmer switch
and the lower button is programmable.

Attributes Tab Click the Attributes tab to change the switch’s name, button type, or col-
ors, and to specify the engraving text.

Switch Name The default button name consists of the keypad number (e.g., S34, ST34,
etc.), the gang number (e.g., G01, G02, etc.), and a simple sequential but-
ton number (e.g., B1, B2, B3, etc.) The system counts buttons on a keypad
from left to right beginning at the top. For example, “S34:G01:B1” would
be the first button on the first gang on keypad 34. Type over the default
name if you want to change it.

Button Type The default style for the keypad’s buttons is shown. To change the button’s
style, click and select a different type from the drop-down list.

Engraving Text Enter the label to be engraved on the button. You can enter up to eight
characters for “E” and “S” series keypads on each of two lines and 10
characters for “H” series keypads on a single line. Check your entry for
accuracy.

Button Color The default color for the keypad’s buttons is shown. To change the button’s
color, click and select a different color from the drop-down list.

Text Color The default text color for the keypad’s buttons is shown. To change the
button’s text color, click and select a color from the drop-down list.

LED Color The default LED color for the keypad’s buttons is shown. To change the
button’s LED color, click and select a color from the drop-down list.

Comments (Optional) You can add any special instructions or other comments, as
required, in this box. The comment is displayed in this dialog box and on
the Station Design Schedule.

Programming Click the Programming tab to select the function of the switch. The func-
tion determines the action performed when a button is pressed or a data
Tab input device is activated.

The default function for the keypad’s buttons is shown in the “Function”
field (if you selected one). To change the function for the selected button,

108 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

click and select a different function from the drop-down list. The
options available in the Programming tab vary with the function selected.
Most functions require minimal configuration, while others, such as
“User,” require special programming.

NOTE ☞ Most functions require that a load group is assigned to the switch. The Load
Group tab is used to create or edit load groups. Refer to “Load Group Tab” on
page 132 for information.

The following sections describe each available function and the parame-
ters used to define it. Many functions are available only on the 5000LC or
only on the Standard/Compact CCU and are so indicated in the headings.
The functions are listed in alphabetical order.

Close (5000LC) The Close function sets the module outputs to “close,” waits a specified
period of time, then sets the outputs to “stop.” If the button is pressed dur-
ing the wait period, the module outputs are placed in the stop state. This
function is paired with the Open function. When you select the Close func-
tion, the following options are displayed in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. (The Load
Group tab is used to create or edit load groups, refer to page 132 for infor-
mation.)

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for the function.

Active Time Enter the duration that the load group should remain in the “closed” posi-
tion. Enter the time in minutes and seconds. For example, enter 02 and 15
for two minutes and 15 seconds.

Loads The loads in the selected load group are listed.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 109

Edit a Switch Stations

Combination A Combination function uses a security code as a trigger to start a speci-

(5000LC) fied user program. First, the user presses the button to which the combina-
tion function is assigned. This indicates that a security code is expected.
Then the security code must be entered by the user to execute the user pro-
gram.

On a nine-button keypad, the easiest keypad on which to enter a combina-

tion code, the keys simulate a typical number pad. Number one is located
at the top, left corner of the keypad. Keys are numbered consecutively to
the right and then from left to right on the next rows (in the same manner
as a telephone keypad).

To enter the combination on a keypad with fewer than nine buttons, the
user must have some understanding of the absolute position of the buttons
(see the tables on the next page). For example, on a five-button “S” series
keypad, the button positions are numbered 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, so the user
must know that to enter a 3 in the code, for example, they would press the
second button. On a two-button keypad the button positions are 2 and 8, so
the user would press the first button to enter a “2.”

If the user presses the wrong key, the combination function is aborted and
must be restarted. The LED remains on until a valid code is selected or an
invalid number is entered.

When you select the Combination function, the following options are dis-
played in the Programming tab.

110 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

Enter Combination Type the security code that the user must enter to execute the user pro-
gram. Combination codes must be entered using the absolute position of
each button. For example, on a nine-button “S” series keypad, you can use
a code with any of the digits 1 through 9; on a five-button keypad you can
use the digits 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9; on a two-button keypad you can use only the
digits 2 and 8, and so on.

The tables below identify the switch positions for each possible variation.

“S” Series Keypad

Number of Buttons Button Position
1 5
2 2, 8
3 2, 5, 8
4 1, 3, 7, 9
5 1, 3, 5, 7, 9
6 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9
7 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9
8 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9
9 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

“H” Series Keypad 1–5 Button

Number of Buttons Button Position
1 6
2 4, 6
3 2, 4, 6
4 2, 4, 6, 8
5 2, 4, 6, 8, 9

“H” Series Keypad 6–9 Button

Number of Buttons Button Position
6 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
7 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
8 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
9 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 111

Edit a Switch Stations

“E” Series Keypad 1–4 Button (Single Gang)

Number of Buttons Button Position
1 1
2 1, 3
3 1, 2, 3
4 1, 2, 3, 4

“E” Series Keypad 5–8 Button (Dual Gang)

Number of Buttons Button Position
5 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
7 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
8 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

No two combination codes can be the same or begin with the same series
of digits. For example, if you created codes “1 2 3” and “1 2 3 4,” “1 2 3”
would execute its user program before “1 2 3 4” could be entered.

NOTE ☞ If you are using a combination code on a multi-gang keypad, note that combi-
nation codes cannot cross gang boundaries.

Select Event Click and select the user event for the combination. All events that you
have created are listed. Refer to “[Create Event]” below for information on
creating a user event.

[Add Event] Click [Add Event] to add the selected user event with its combination code
to the function.

[Edit Event] In the event list, click the user event that you want to edit, and then click
[Edit Event]. The Combination Event dialog box is displayed for the
selected user event. Refer to “[Create Event],” below for information on
the options in the dialog box.

[Remove Event] Click a user event in the list, and then click [Remove Event] to remove a
user event and combination code from the function. The user event is not
deleted and remains available to be selected again.

[Create Event] A user event triggers a program that contains the instructions executed
when a combination code is entered at a “Combination” switch. A user
event’s program may be as simple or as complex as you require and is
capable of executing any action (or series of actions) supported by the
CCU. Click [Create Event] to create a user event’s user program.

112 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

The following dialog box is displayed.

User events are added to the “Event” drop-down list (in the Programming
tab) for the Combination function as they are created.

Event Name
Enter a name to describe the event.

Function Name
The user program that you create can also be used as a User function
(see “User (5000LC)” on page 129). Enter a name for the user func-
tion. The new function will have the same program as the event, but
you will be able to modify it as a User function.

Event
User event is the only type of event available.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 113

Edit a Switch Stations

The remaining options are used to create the user program. The program is
then displayed in the Program box. For instructions, refer to Chapter 12,
“5000LC Programming” beginning on page 177.

The [Get Macro] button is used to import a macro program. A macro is a

file containing a pre-defined program. For information on macros, refer to
Chapter 13, “5000LC Macros” on page 201.

Dimmer (5000LC) When you select the Dimmer function, the following options are displayed
in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
load group are listed. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit load
groups, refer to page 132 for information.

Ramp Time Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that it will take to go from the mini-
mum dim value to the maximum dim value (and vice versa) when the but-
ton is held in. The minimum and maximum values are entered in the load
list (see below).

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for the function.

When a dimmer button is pressed and held, loads in the load group
assigned to the button begin ramping up and down until the button is
released or for approximately three ramp cycles. When the button is
released or the third ramp cycle is reached, the loads stop ramping at their
current level. When the load group defined for the dimmer function is
turned on, it starts with the last setting and ramps down. If all loads within
the group maintain the same percentage of difference between minimum

114 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

and maximum dim levels (e.g., 20/80, 30/90, 10/70, etc.), all loads main-
tain the same percentage of difference. Loads in a group always ramp at
the same rate.

Dimmer (Master) When you select the Dimmer (Master) function, the following options are
(Standard/Compact) displayed in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
load group are listed. The Dimmer (Master) function can control multiple
loads. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit load groups, refer to
page 132 for information.

NOTE ☞ For optimum performance, it is suggested that no more than 10 loads be

assigned to each Dimmer (Master) switch.

The dimmer related settings, “Ramp Time,” “LED Invert,” and “Minimum
Turn On Level” are included in the global parameters for Standard and
Compact CCUs. Refer to “Switch/LED Invert” on page 51 for information
on these settings.

If all of the loads controlled by a Dimmer (Master) switch are off, they
will turn on when the button is pressed. If all of the loads controlled by a
Dimmer (Master) switch are on, they will turn off when the button is
pressed and released quickly (within one-half second). If part of the loads
controlled by this switch type are off, they are turned on when the button is
pressed. If the button is held for more than one-half second, the loads
begin a raise or lower action. The action will normally be opposite the pre-
vious raise/lower action that occurred from the switch. When loads are
turned on by the press of a button, the loads will first rise in intensity.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 115

Edit a Switch Stations

Dimmer (Single) When you select the Dimmer (Single) function, the following options are
(Standard/Compact) displayed in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The Dimmer
(Single) function can control only a single load (a load group that contains
one load). The Load Group tab is used to create or edit load groups, refer
to page 132 for information.

Dim Level Enter a minimum and maximum dim level for the load when ramping.

The dimmer related settings, “Ramp Time,” “LED Invert,” and “Minimum
Turn On Level” are included in the global parameters for Standard and
Compact CCUs. Refer to “Switch/LED Invert” on page 51 for information
on these settings.

Lower (5000LC) The Lower function initiates a “StartRampToMin()” command when the
button is pressed and a “StopRamp()” when the button is released. This
function is paired with the Raise function.

When you select the Lower function, the following options are displayed in
the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
load group are listed. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit load
groups, refer to page 132 for information.

116 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

Ramp Time Enter the amount of time (in seconds) you want it to take to ramp to the
minimum position when the button is pressed.

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for the function.

Lower (Single) The Lower (Single) function allows a single load to lower at an even rate.
(Standard/Compact) While the button is held in, the load lowers. When the button is released,
the load holds its current level. When you select the Lower (Single) func-
tion, the following options are displayed in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The Lower
(Single) function can control only a single load (a load group that contains
one load). The Load Group tab is used to create or edit load groups, refer
to page 132 for information.

The dimmer related settings, “Ramp Time,” “LED Invert,” and “Minimum
Turn On Level” are included in the global parameters for Standard and
Compact CCUs. Refer to “Switch/LED Invert” on page 51 for information
on these settings.

Momentary The Momentary function is used to turn on a load group when the button is
(All CCUs) pressed and turn it off when the button is released. When you select the
Momentary function, the following options are displayed in the Program-
ming tab.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 117

Edit a Switch Stations

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
selected load group are listed. For Standard/Compact CCUs, the load
group can only have one load. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit
load groups, refer to page 132 for information.

LED Invert For the 5000LC, select this option if you want to reverse the LED action
for this function. For Standard/Compact CCUs, the “LED Invert” option is
included in the global settings for the CCU (see “Switch/LED Invert” on
page 51).

Motion Control The Motion Control function is used to control two-way motor loads.
(5000LC) When the button is pressed, the loads are started in motion in one direc-
tion. The load group remains on for the active time specified, then turns
off. The LED is lit for the duration. When the button is pressed again, the
direction is reversed and the load group remains on for the specified active
time. If the button is pressed while the motors are running, they will stop.

Each time the button is pressed, the direction of the last action is reversed.
As long as none of the loads are also part of another load group, all motors
in the load group remain synchronized.

When you select the Motion Control function, the following options are
displayed in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
selected load group are listed. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit
load groups, refer to page 132.

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for this function.

Active Time Enter the duration that the load group should remain on each time the but-
ton is pressed. For example, when opening/closing blinds or curtains, set
the active time for the load that requires the longest duration. Enter the
time in minutes and seconds. For example, enter 02 and 15 for two min-
utes and 15 seconds.

118 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

On, Off (5000LC) The On and Off functions (Master On and Off for Standard/Compact
Master On, CCUs) represent discreet on and off values. “On” turns the load group on;
“Off” turns it off.
Master Off
When you select the On or Off function, the following options are dis-
(Standard/Compact) played in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
selected load group are listed. For Standard/Compact CCUs, the load
group can only have one load. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit
load groups, refer to page 132 for information.

LED Invert For the 5000LC, select this option if you want to reverse the LED action
for this function. For Standard/Compact CCUs, this option is included in
the global settings for the CCU (see “Switch/LED Invert” on page 51).

Master Off Toggle The Master Off Toggle function allows one or more loads to be turned on
(Standard/Compact) and off. If part of the loads controlled by this switch type are on, they are
turned off when the button is pressed.

When you select the Master Off Toggle function, the following options are
displayed in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
selected load group are listed. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit
load groups, refer to page 132 for information.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 119

Edit a Switch Stations

The “LED Invert” option is included in the global settings for the CCU
(see “Switch/LED Invert” on page 51).

Open (5000LC) The Open function sets the module outputs to “open,” waits a specified
period of time, then sets the outputs to “stop.” If the button is pressed dur-
ing the wait period, the module outputs are placed in the stop state. This
function is paired with the Close function.

When you select the Open function, the following options are displayed in
the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
selected load group are listed. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit
load groups, refer to page 132 for information.

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for this function.

Active Time Enter the duration that the load group should remain in the “open” posi-
tion. Enter the time in minutes and seconds. For example, enter 02 and 15
for two minutes and 15 seconds.

Open/Close The Open/Close function acts on two outputs of a control module and is
(Standard/Compact) specifically designed to operate the interlock relay module. The Open/
Close switch type must be used in pairs with one switch for open and
another for close. If the load controlled by a switch is off, it is turned on
when the button is pressed and the other (interlocked) load is turned off. If
the load controlled by the switch is on, it is turned off and any motion is
stopped.

WARNING The motion control device MUST HAVE END LIMIT SWITCHES to prevent dam-
age to the motor and drive mechanism.

120 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

When you select the Open/Close function, the following options are dis-
played in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group that consists of a single load from the
drop-down list. The loads in the selected load group are listed. The Load
Group tab is used to create or edit load groups, refer to page 132 for infor-
mation.

The “LED Invert” option is included in the global settings for the CCU
(see “Switch/LED Invert” on page 51).

Raise (5000LC) The Raise function initiates a “StartRampToMax()” command when the
button is pressed and a “StopRamp()” when the button is released. This
function is paired with the Lower function.

When you select the Raise function, the following options are displayed in
the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
load group are listed. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit load
groups, refer to page 132 for information.

Ramp Time Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that it will take to ramp to the mini-
mum position.

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for this function.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 121

Edit a Switch Stations

Raise (Single) The Raise (Single) function allows a single load to raise at an even rate.
(Standard/Compact) While the button is held in, the load raises. When the button is released,
the load holds its current level.

When you select the Raise (Single) function, the following options are dis-
played in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group that contains a single load from the
drop-down list. The loads in the load group are listed. The Load Group tab
is used to create or edit load groups, refer to page 132 for information.

The dimmer related settings, “Ramp Time,” “LED Invert,” and “Minimum
Turn On Level” are included in the global parameters for Standard and
Compact CCUs. Refer to “Switch/LED Invert” on page 51 for information
on these settings.

Scene (5000LC) The Scene function is used to define a scene that specifies on and off
actions. On the first button press, the scene fades on to scene levels. On the
second press, it fades off. When you select the Scene function, the follow-
ing options are displayed in the Programming tab.

122 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

Load Group Click and select a load group. The loads in the selected load group are
listed. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit load groups, refer to
page 132 for information.

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for this function.

Scene Preset Toggle The Scene Preset Toggle function can be set up to act as a Scene Toggle or
(Standard/Compact) a Scene On function in Job Parameters (see “Switch/LED Invert,” “Scene
Option” on page 52). The Scene Preset Toggle function is used to turn a
scene on (and off if “Scene Toggle” is selected) at preset levels using spec-
ified fade on and fade off times.

If set up as “Scene Toggle,” the same switch is used to turn the scene on
and off. On the first button press, the scene fades on to scene levels. On the
second press, it fades off. If set up as “Scene On,” one switch is used to
turn the scene on and a different switch is used to turn the scene off.

The scene preset levels for the Scene Preset Toggle function may be
locked or unlocked. For the Standard CCU, this is set up in Job Parameters
(see “Switch/LED Invert,” “Scene Preset Levels (Standard CCU Only)” on
page 52). The Compact CCU has a switch on the bottom of the cabinet to
lock or unlock scene preset levels. If set to “locked,” the user cannot
change the preset levels for the scene (see “Switch/LED Invert,” “Scene
Preset Levels (Standard CCU Only)” on page 52). If set to “unlocked,” the
user can change the scene presets. The user can record the current settings
of the scene by holding the button in for more than 4 seconds. The newly
recorded settings become the presets for the scene.

When you select the Scene Preset Toggle function, the following options
are displayed in the Programming tab.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 123

Edit a Switch Stations

Load Group Click and select a load group. The loads in the selected load group are
listed. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit load groups, refer to
page 132 for information.

Fade Time Enter a fade time in minutes and seconds. For example, enter 02 : 00 for 2
minutes, enter 02 : 15 for 2 minutes and 15 seconds, enter 00 : 45 for 45
seconds, and so on. The fade time allows dimmable loads to gradually fade
up/down to the target level. A fade time of 0 causes immediate setting to
the target level. When multiple loads are being controlled, each load fades
at an even rate. Thus, a load at 60% intensity takes twice as long to fade up
to 100% as does a load at 80% intensity.

The “LED Invert” option is included in the global settings for the CCU
(see “Switch/LED Invert” on page 51).

Scene On (5000LC) The Scene On function is used to define a scene that can be turned on
(fades on to scene levels) but cannot be turned off from the same switch.
The scene must be turned off using a different switch or method.

When you select the Scene On function, the following options are dis-
played in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
selected load group are listed. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit
load groups, refer to page 132 for information.

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for the function.

Switch Pointer The Switch Pointer function can be used when two or more switches use
(5000LC) the same function and load group. Define a function for a source switch,
then assign the Switch Pointer function to a duplicate switch. The Switch
Pointer function “points” to the source switch's function and load group
and also updates the LEDs so they match the source switch’s LEDs.

124 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

When you select the Switch Pointer function, the following options are dis-
played in the Programming tab

NOTE ☞ You can also create duplicate switch assignments by using the same load group
and function at both keypad locations.

Switch Click and select the source switch.

NOTE ☞ If you modify or delete a source switch, remember that the Switch Pointer
switch will also be affected. For example, if you change a source switch’s load
group, you must edit each switch that points to it and select the source switch
again.

Timed Flash The Timed Flash function turns the load(s) in the assigned load group on
(Standard/Compact) and off at one second intervals. The flashing lasts for the duration speci-
fied. Any number of loads can be assigned to the load group. When you
select the Timed Flash function, the following options are displayed in the
Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
selected load group are listed. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit
load groups, refer to page 132 for information.

Active Time Enter the duration that you want the load group to flash on and off. Enter
the time in hours and minutes. For example, enter 00 : 20 for 20 minutes,
enter 02 : 15 for 2 hours and 15 minutes, and so on.

The “LED Invert” option is included in the global settings for the CCU
(see “Switch/LED Invert” on page 51).

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 125

Edit a Switch Stations

Timed On, The Timed On and Timed Toggle functions use a timer to specify the dura-
Timed Toggle tion that the load group will remain on (e.g., bathroom fans). When the
switch is activated, it turns on the load group and the timer, and then the
(5000LC) load group automatically turns off after the specified duration.

With the Timed On function, if the button is pressed again while the load
group is still activated, the timer resets, and the load group remains on for
the full duration again.

With the Timed Toggle function, if the button is pressed again while the
load group is still on, the load group turns off.

When you select the Timed On or Timed Toggle function, the following
options are displayed in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
selected load group are listed. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit
load groups, refer to page 132 for information

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for the function.

Active Time Enter the duration that you want the load group to remain on. Enter the
time in hours, minutes, and seconds. For example, enter 00 : 20 : 00 for 20
minutes, enter 02 : 15 : 00 for 2 hours and 15 minutes, enter 00 : 00 : 45
for 45 seconds, and so on.

Timed Toggle The Timed Toggle function uses a timer to specify the duration that the
(Standard/Compact) load group will remain on (e.g., bathroom fans). When the switch is acti-
vated, it turns on the load group and the timer, and then the load group
automatically turns off after the specified duration.

The Timed Toggle function can be set up to act as a Timed Toggle or a

Timed On function in Job Parameters. Refer to “Switch/LED Invert,”
“Timed Option” on page 51. If set up as “Timed Toggle,” the load group
turns off if the button is pressed again while the load group is still on. If set

126 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

up as “Timed On,” the timer resets and the load group remains on for the
full duration again if the button is pressed again while the load group is
still activated.

When you select the Timed Toggle function, the following options are dis-
played in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group. The loads in the selected load group are
listed. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit load groups, refer to
page 132 for information.

Active Time Enter the duration that you want the load group to remain on. Enter the
time in hours and minutes. For example, enter 00 : 20 for 20 minutes, enter
02 : 15 for 2 hours and 15 minutes, and so on.

The “LED Invert” option is included in the global settings for the CCU
(see “Switch/LED Invert” on page 51).

Toggle (On), The Toggle (On) and Toggle (Off) functions turn the load group on and
Toggle (Off) off. However, when controlling multiple loads, whether a load is turned on
or off depends on the state of the load when the button is pressed, as fol-
(5000LC) lows:

• If only some of the loads in the load group are on when Toggle
(Off) is first pressed, they are turned off so that all loads are off. The
next press of Toggle (Off) turns all loads on. Pressing it again turns
all loads off. Subsequent presses turn all loads on and off.
• If only some of the loads in the load group are off when Toggle
(On) is first pressed, they are turned on so that all loads are on. The
next press of Toggle (On) then turns all loads off. Pressing it again
turns all loads on. Subsequent presses turn all loads off and on.
• In a load group that contains a single load, there is no difference
between Toggle (Off) and Toggle (On).

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 127

Edit a Switch Stations

The LED for either toggle is on when any load in the group is on.

When you select the Toggle On or Toggle Off function, the following
options are displayed in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
selected load group are listed. The Load Group tab is used to create or edit
load groups, refer to page 132 for information.

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for this function.

Toggle (Single) The Toggle (Single) function allows a single load to be turned on or off. If
(Standard/Compact) the load is on, it will turn off when the button is pressed. If the load is off,
it will turn on when the button is pressed. The LED is on when the load is
on.

When you select the Toggle (Single) function, the following options are dis-
played in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group that contains a single load from the
drop-down list. The loads in the selected load group are listed. The Load
Group tab is used to create or edit load groups, refer to page 132 for infor-
mation.

The “LED Invert” option is included in the global settings for the CCU
(see “Switch/LED Invert” on page 51).

128 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

User (5000LC) The User function is used to create a program with custom (user) instruc-
tions. A user program can be as simple or as complex as you require and is
capable of executing any action (or series of actions) supported by the
CCU.

You can assign a User function to a switch or timer. When assigned to a

switch, the user program can execute separate instructions for press, hold,
or release actions. When assigned to a timer, it can execute separate
instructions for the timer’s start or stop actions. (A stop action is not exe-
cuted unless a duration is specified.)

When you select the User function, the following options are displayed in
the Programming tab.

Event Select the event to be executed by the program, Switch Press, Switch Hold,
or Switch Release.

The remaining options are used to create the user program. The program is
then displayed in the Program box. For instructions, refer to Chapter 12,
“5000LC Programming” beginning on page 177.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 129

Edit a Switch Stations

The [Get Macro] button is used to import a macro program. A macro is a

file containing a pre-defined program. For information on macros, refer to
Chapter 13, “5000LC Macros” on page 201.

Vacation (5000LC) Assign the Vacation function to a switch to turn the vacation mode on or
off. The Programming tab is used to set up programs that switch different
loads on and off in a random pattern to simulate routine household activi-
ties. You select up to three time periods (e.g., morning, midday, evening)
and assign timers and load groups to each time period. The CCU then ran-
domly turns the loads on and off during the time period. The vacation
mode is executed by pressing the button and is ended by pressing the but-
ton again.

When you select the Vacation function, the following options are dis-
played in the Programming tab.

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for this function.

Daily Time Periods Vacation timer events are defined by time period. Select the time period
you want to set up. Then set up the start and end time of the period, select
the load groups to be turned on and off during the period, select the days of
the week you want timers added for each load group, and select when and
for how long during the period each load group is to be activated using the
remaining fields, described below.

When you have finished defining the first period, you can select a second
and then a third time period and set each up in the same manner. For exam-
ple, you can define a first period based on a family's morning routine, a
second period based on their midday routine, and a third period based on
their evening/night routine.

130 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

Start/End Enter the start and end times for the period selected. In the first field, type
the hour (type 05 for five o'clock,10 for ten o'clock, and so on). Click in
the next field, and type the minutes after the hour (e.g., 05, 30, 45, etc.).
Leave the minute field blank or type 00 for an even hour value. Then, click
“AM” or “PM.”

Use the following fields to set up one or more load groups to be activated
during the specified period and the days and time frames that you want
each load group to be active.

Timers Select each day of the week that you want the selected load group (below)
to be active. Timers are added to the job for each day selected.

NOTE ☞ To view the timers for a Vacation function, in the Timers view, select [Edit DST
and Astro], and enable the “Show Vacation Mode Timers” option. Refer to
“Edit DST and Astronomical Settings” on page 165 for more information.

Load Group Click and select a load group to be activated during the specified
period on the selected days of the week. (The Load Group tab is used to
create or edit load groups, refer to page 132 for information.)

When Click and select “when” during the period the selected load group
should cycle, Anytime (random), Beginning, Middle, or End. The time
frame that each load stays on is controlled by the entry in the “How Long”
field (below).

How Long After selecting when a load will turn on (“When” field, above), indicate
how long the load should remain on. The choices are 1–30 minutes, 30
minutes–2 hours, or 2–12 hours.

[Add] Click [Add] to add the load group setup to the time period. Then set up
each additional load group for the same period in the same manner. All
load groups that have been added to the period are listed.

[Remove] To remove a load group from the period, select it in the list and click
[Remove].

NOTE ☞ If power is lost while vacation mode is active, it becomes inactive, and loads
return to their previous states and levels.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 131

Edit a Switch Stations

Vacation Switch The Vacation Switch function is used to turn vacation mode on and off.
(Standard/Compact) You set up vacation mode using the “Parameters” option in Job Parameters
(see “Vacation Mode” on page 54). The vacation mode is executed by
pressing the button and is ended by pressing the button again.

When you select the Vacation Switch function, no options are displayed in
the Programming tab. The Vacation Switch is a simple on/off switch.

Load Group A load group is a group of loads (and their parameters) used together in
one switch. LiteWare 3.6 uses load groups to make load management eas-
Tab ier. A load group may consist of a single load, several loads, or all loads in
the load list. In addition, a load may belong to any number of load groups,
and one load group can be assigned to more than one switch.

Standard/Compact CCU The program file (or definition file) for Standard and Compact CCUs
Load Groups includes only load information (i.e., load names and preset level/minimum
turn on level setting, if entered). Load group information, such as the
name, description, ID, and so on, is not included.

You create two types of load groups for Standard and Compact CCUs.
Those that contain multiple loads for “master” switches and those that
contain only one load for “single” switches.

132 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

Add a Load Group Click the Load Group tab to create or edit a load group.

Do the following to add a new load group:

1. If you have not yet created any load groups, “NoLoadGroup” is

selected at the “Load Group” field. If you have created load groups,
and you want to create a load group similar to an existing one, click
and select the load group from the drop-down list. You can select
“NoLoadGroup” if you want to start with an “empty” load group. Type
over the label or selected load group name to enter a new load group
name.

NOTE ☞ Load group names can be up to 49 characters long. When the job is converted
to a program file for upload to the CCU, load group names are truncated to 15
characters (for the 5000LC only). LiteWare 3.6 automatically creates unique
load group names of 15 characters.

NOTE ☞ If you make changes to an existing load group (without changing the name),
you change it for all switches in the database to which it has been assigned. If
you don’t want to change the existing load group, make sure you enter a new
name.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 133

Edit a Switch Stations

2. All loads that have not yet been assigned to the load group are listed in
the “Unassigned Loads” box. Use the scroll bar on the right to move
through the load list. To assign a single load to the load group, click
the load to select it, then click [Assign], or double-click the load. To
select several consecutive loads, press and hold <Shift>, then click
the first and last loads in the group you want to select. To select several
non-consecutive loads, press and hold <Ctrl>, then click each load
that you want to select. The load or loads are added to the “Assigned
Loads” list.

To assign all unassigned loads to the load group, click [Assign All].

3. To remove a load from the “Assigned Loads” list, click it to select it

and then click [Unassign]. To unassign all loads from the load group,
click [Unassign All].

4. Set the ramp time, dimmer levels, fade levels, and preset/minimum
turn-on levels for the loads as required. Refer to the next section for
information.

Set Parameters After you assign the loads to a load group, you need to set the parameters.
The number of parameters available depends on the type of CCU, as fol-
lows.

5000LC Though the parameters for a load group will vary depending on the func-
tion, possible parameters include:

• ramp time for the load group

• minimum turn on/preset level per load
• minimum dim level per load
• maximum dim level per load
• fade on time per load
• fade off time per load

Standard/Compact Parameters include:

• minimum turn on/preset level per load

NOTE ☞ If you change the parameters for a load group, they are changed for all
switches to which the load group is assigned. If you require the same loads
with different parameters, you must create a new load group.

134 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Edit a Switch

Ramp Time (Dimmer function only) Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that it will
(5000LC) take to go from the minimum dim level to the maximum dim level (and
vice versa) when the button is held in. This setting applies to all loads in
the load group. The minimum and maximum levels for each load are
entered in the assigned load list.

The following parameters are in columns in the “Assigned Loads” box. To

edit a parameter, click in the parameter’s table cell for the load you want to
edit, then click again to get an edit box and cursor. (To see a complete col-
umn heading, click on the border between column headings, hold down
the mouse button, and drag the column border.)

Load The load number is displayed for reference and cannot be changed.

Description The load description is displayed. You can change it here if necessary.

ID The assigned load address is displayed for reference and cannot be

changed.

Preset Level/Minimum If the load group is for a scene switch, enter the preset level (where 0 is no
Turn-On Level light and 100 is full brightness). For other functions, enter the minimum
(All CCUs) turn-on level for the load. Normally a load will turn on to the last known
level, but if the last level is lower than the minimum entered here, this
value will be used instead.

Minimum (5000LC) (Dimmer function only) Enter the minimum dim value for the load when
ramping.

Maximum (5000LC) (Dimmer function only) Enter the maximum dim value for the load when
ramping.

Fade On (5000LC) Enter the number of seconds that the fade-on should last. This is the time
from initial “turn on” until the preset, last known, or minimum turn-on
level is reached.

Fade Off (5000LC) Enter the number of seconds that the fade-off should last. This is the time
from the “on” state to the “off” state.

Area The area or location of the load is displayed for reference and cannot be
changed.

Function The function of the load is displayed for reference and cannot be changed.

[Set Column] To set a parameter to the same value for all loads in the load group, enter
the parameter’s value in the table, then click [Set Column].

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 135

Edit a Switch Stations

[Set All] To set all parameters to the same values for all loads in the load group,
enter all parameters’ values for one load. Then, with that load selected,
click [Set All].

Switch Information Click [Switches] to display information about the association between
loads, load groups, and triggers. You can do the following:

• View the loads and triggers (switches and timers) used by a load group
• Identify all load groups to which a load belongs and which triggers use
the load (see “All Loads” on the next page)
• List all loads assigned to load groups
• List all loads not assigned to load groups

You can use this information to identify all load groups, to identify the
triggers associated with a load before removing it from the load group or
editing its parameters, and to identify empty load groups, all unassigned
loads, and so on.

The Switches dialog box is shown below.

Load Group Click and select one of the following from the drop-down list:

136 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Delete a Switch

One load group:

The “Assigned Loads” box lists the loads in the load group. The
“Assigned Triggers” box lists any triggers (switches or timers) that use
the load group.

All Loads:
The “Assigned Loads” box lists all loads in the job. Click a load, and
the “Assigned Triggers” box lists any triggers (switches or timers) that
use the selected load. The “Assigned Load Groups” box lists all load
groups that include the selected load.

Loads Assigned to Load Groups:

The “Assigned Loads” box lists all loads that have been assigned to a
load group.

Loads Not Assigned to Load Groups:

The “Assigned Loads” box lists all loads that have NOT been assigned
to a load group.

Click [OK] when you are finished viewing information to return to the
Switch Properties dialog box.

Delete a Switch
You can design a custom keypad by deleting a switch or switches from a
standard keypad design. The absolute button positions remain the same.

To delete a switch from a keypad, right-click the switch (a selected switch

has a yellow border), and select Delete from the shortcut menu. The fol-
lowing message is displayed.

Click [Yes] to delete the switch or [No] if you do not want the switch
deleted.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 137

Switch Summary Stations

NOTE ☞ You cannot add a switch to a keypad. If you delete a switch in error, you can
either delete the keypad and start over, or you can change the keypad type to a
larger keypad to restore the switches.

Switch Summary
To show or hide the Switch Summary, pull down the View menu and click
Switch Summary.

The Switch Summary lists all keypad switches for the currently selected
job. Switches are grouped by keypad. If you select a switch in the Stations
view, the switch is highlighted in the Switch Summary list. If you select a
keypad, all switches for that keypad are highlighted in the list.

If necessary, click [Refresh] to deselect any previously selected loads in the

load list.

You can change the columns in the Switch Summary to better accommo-
date the data and fit your computer monitor, as follows:

Adjust Column Widths To adjust column widths, move the mouse pointer to the space between
column headings (e.g., Switch Name, Function, Load Group, etc.). The
pointer changes to a double arrow. Click and hold down the mouse button.

138 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Load and Programming Summary

A column separator line appears. Continue to hold down the mouse button
and drag the separator line to expand or contract the width of the column.
You can drag the line all the way to the left to close up a column that you
don’t need. The changes are saved when you exit the program.

Move Columns You can arrange the columns in any order. To move a column, click and
hold on a column heading and drag it to a different location.

Sort the List To sort the list, click a column heading to sort alphabetically or numeri-
cally by the items in the column. Click once to sort in ascending order;
click again to sort in descending order.

Load and Programming Summary

To show or hide the Load and Programming Summary, pull down the
View menu and click Load and Programming Summary.

You can use the Load and Programming Summary to do the following:

• Assign a load group to a switch on a keypad or to a timer

• Add a new load group
• Edit a load group
• Copy a load group
• Delete a load group
You can change the columns in the Load and Programming Summary to
better accommodate the data and fit your computer monitor, as follows:

Adjust Column Widths To adjust column widths, move the mouse pointer to the space between
column headings (e.g., ID, Load, Description, etc.). The pointer changes
to a double arrow. Click and hold down the mouse button. A column sepa-
rator line appears. Continue to hold down the mouse button and drag the
separator line to expand or contract the width of the column. You can drag
the line all the way to the left to close up a column that you don’t need.
The changes are saved when you exit the program.

Move Columns You can arrange the columns in any order. To move a column, click and
hold on a column heading and drag it to a different location.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 139

Load and Programming Summary Stations

Sort the List To sort the list, click a column heading to sort alphabetically or numeri-
cally by the items in the column. Click once to sort in ascending order;
click again to sort in descending order.

Assign or You can use “drag and drop” from the Load and Programming Summary
to assign a load group to a switch or input or to change a switch’s load
Change a Load group.

Group 1. Select a switch in the Stations view, and its name and function are dis-
played at the top of the summary. If a load group is already assigned to
the selected switch, it is shown in the “Load Group” field, and all loads
in the load group are highlighted at the top of the load list. If no load
group has been assigned to the switch, “NoLoadGroup” is shown in
the “Load Group” field.

2. Click at the “Load Group” field, and, from the drop-down list,
select the load group you want to assign to the switch. The loads in the
load group are highlighted at the top of the load list.

140 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Load and Programming Summary

3. Click and hold the mouse button anywhere in the highlighted group of
loads in the list and drag the mouse. The mouse pointer changes to
.

4. Continue to hold down the mouse button, and drag the pointer to the
switch. The pointer changes to as you move it over the switch.

5. Release the mouse button.

If no load group was assigned to the switch, the selected load group is
assigned, and the Switch Properties dialog box is displayed so you can
set the switch properties (refer to “Edit a Switch” on page 107).

If a load group was already assigned to the switch, the following

prompt appears:

Click [Yes] to change the switch’s load group, and the Switch Proper-
ties dialog box is displayed so you can edit the switch properties. Click
[No] if you did not intend to change it.

Add a Load Do the following to add a new load group:

Group 1. Click [Refresh] to deselect any previously selected loads in the load
list. “NoLoadGroup” appears in the “Load Group” field, and a [New]
button appears next to it.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 141

Load and Programming Summary Stations

2. Click [New] and the following dialog box is displayed.

142 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Load and Programming Summary

NOTE ☞ Load group names can be up to 49 characters long. When the job is converted
to a program file for upload to the CCU, load group names are truncated to 15
characters (for the 5000LC only). LiteWare 3.6 automatically creates unique
load group names of 15 characters.

3. Type over the “NoLoadGroup” label to enter a new load group name.

4. All available loads are listed in the “Unassigned Loads” box. Use the
scroll bar on the right to move through the load list. To assign a single
load to the load group, click the load to select it, then click [Assign], or
double-click the load. To select several consecutive loads, press and
hold <Shift>, then click the first and last loads in the group you want
to select. To select several non-consecutive loads, press and hold
<Ctrl>, then click each load that you want to select. The load or loads
are added to the “Assigned Loads” list.

To assign all unassigned loads to the load group, click [Assign All].

5. To remove a load from the “Assigned Loads” list, click it to select it

and then click [Unassign]. To unassign all loads from the load group,
click [Unassign All].

6. Set the ramp time, dimmer levels, fade levels, and preset/minimum
turn-on levels for the loads as required. Refer to “Set Parameters” on
page 134 for information.

7. Click [OK] to create the load group and exit the dialog box.

8. For information on assigning the new load group to a switch or input,

refer to the previous section, “Assign or Change a Load Group” on
page 140.

Edit a Load To edit a switch’s load group, click the switch in the Stations view, and its
name and function are displayed at the top of the summary. The load group
Group assigned to the selected switch is shown in the “Load Group” field, and all
loads in the load group are highlighted at the top of the load list.

To edit any load group, click at the “Load Group” field, and select the
load group you want to edit from the drop-down list. The loads in the load
group are highlighted at the top of the load list.

Click [Edit] and the Load Group Properties dialog box opens with the
selected load group displayed. Refer to “Load Group Tab” on page 132 for
information on the load group options and functions.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 143

Load and Programming Summary Stations

Copy a Load To make a copy of a switch’s load group, click the switch in the Stations
view, and its name and function are displayed at the top of the summary.
Group The load group assigned to the selected switch is shown in the “Load
Group” field, and all loads in the load group are highlighted at the top of
the load list.

To make a copy of any load group, click at the “Load Group” field, and
select the load group you want to copy from the drop-down list. The loads
in the load group are highlighted at the top of the load list.

Click [Copy] and the Load Group Properties dialog box opens with the
selected load group displayed. Refer to “Load Group Tab” on page 132 for
information on the load group options and functions.

An exact copy of the load group is made with “copy of” added to the
beginning of the name. At the “LoadGroup” field, type over the default
load group name to enter a new load group name.

Delete a Load You can delete load groups that are no longer needed. Deleting a load
group has no effect on the loads or on other load groups.
Group
To delete a load group assigned to a switch, click the switch in the Stations
view, and its name and function are displayed at the top of the summary.
The load group assigned to the selected switch is shown in the “Load
Group” field, and all loads in the load group are highlighted at the top of
the load list.

To delete any load group, click at the “Load Group” field, and select
the load group you want to delete from the drop-down list. The loads in the
load group are highlighted at the top of the load list.

Click [Delete]. If the load group is assigned to any switches, timers, com-
binations, or startup events, the following prompt is displayed.

144 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Station and Gang Summary

If you delete the load group, it is removed from the inputs to which it is
assigned, and you must assign new load groups. Click [Yes] to delete the
load group. Click [No] if you did not intend to delete it.

If the load group is unassigned, the following prompt is displayed.

Click [Yes] to delete the load group. Click [No] if you did not intend to
delete it.

Station and Gang Summary

To show or hide the Station and Gang Summary, pull down the View menu
and click Station and Gang Summary.

The Station and Gang Summary lists information about each keypad,
including gang data, keypad type. and faceplate style and color for the cur-
rently selected job.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 145

Print a Station Design Schedule Stations

For keypads that have multiple gangs, a separate line is added to the sum-
mary to describe each gang.

In the Station view, select a keypad or gang in the Station and Gang Sum-
mary pane, and the selected keypad is outlined in the Stations view. Or
select a keypad or gang in the Stations view to highlight it in the Station
and Gang Summary.

If you have made any changes to gang or keypad information since start-
ing the LiteWare session, click [Refresh] to update the information.

You can change the columns in the Station and Gang Summary to better
accommodate the data and fit your computer monitor, as follows:

Adjust Column Widths To adjust column widths, move the mouse pointer to the space between
column headings (e.g., Address, Gang Name, Gang Type, Station Type,
etc.). The pointer changes to a double arrow. Click and hold down the
mouse button. A column separator line appears. Continue to hold down the
mouse button and drag the separator line to expand or contract the width
of the column. You can drag the line all the way to the left to close up a
column that you don’t need. The changes are saved when you exit the pro-
gram.

Move Columns You can arrange the columns in any order. To move a column, click and
hold on a column heading and drag it to a different location.

Sort the List To sort the list, click a column heading to sort alphabetically or numeri-
cally by the items in the column. Click once to sort in ascending order;
click again to sort in descending order.

Print a Station Design Schedule

A station design schedule is a report that contains a graphic of each key-
pad and its buttons and lists the attributes, function, load group assign-
ments, and parameters for each button.

To view the station design schedule for the job before printing it, click
on the toolbar, or select Print Preview from the File menu.

To print a station design schedule for the job, click on the toolbar, or
select Print from the File menu. A standard Windows Print dialog box is

146 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Stations Print a Station Design Schedule

displayed. If necessary, select the printer and specify the page range and
number of copies. Click [OK] to print the schedule.

The following prompt is displayed.

If you want to include only style and location information about the key-
pads, click [Yes], and only one page is printed for each keypad. If you want
to include both style/location information and button programming detail,
select [No] to print the full report.

The following prompt is displayed.

If you want to include the full station view, click [Yes]. If you want to print
only the design schedules, click [No].

To print a schedule for one keypad, right-click on the keypad, and select
Print from the shortcut menu.

To print schedules for two or more keypads, hold down the <Ctrl> key
and click each keypad that you want to select. All selected keypads are
outlined with yellow. Right-click and select Print from the shortcut menu.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 147

Print a Station Design Schedule Stations

Notes

148 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Timers 10

This chapter provides information on the following functions performed in

the Timers view:

• Add a timer
• Configure a timer (interval, duration, and timing method (clock or sun-
rise/sunset)
• Specify the function the timer performs (on, off, on/off, scene on, or
user)
• Specify the load group controlled by the timer
• Delete a timer
• Enter/edit Daylight Savings Time and astronomical settings

LiteTouch timers can be executed at a specified clock time or they can be

set up to execute at sunrise and sunset (using LiteTouch's astronomical
time capabilities). A duration may also be entered, defining both a start
time and a stop time for the timer.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 149

 Timers

Click [Timers] on the view selection bar and the Timers view is displayed.
The following illustration shows the Timers view with timers added.

Timers are arranged in the order they are added.

View Scale

You can change the scale of magnification in the Timers view by sliding
the horizontal bar left for a smaller scale and right for a larger scale. The
new view scale is used until you change it again (even if you change
views, change jobs, or exit and reopen LiteWare).

150 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Timers Add a Timer

Add a Timer
To add a timer, click [Add Timer] button, or right-click anywhere in the
Timers view, and select Add from the shortcut menu.

Timer Tab The options in the Timer tab are used to configure the timer. If it is not
already selected, click the Timer tab.

Timer Name Enter a name or identifier for the timer (e.g., T1, Timer 1, etc.). The name
is used to identify the timer on the timers schedule report and is listed
above the timer in the Timers view.

Description Enter a description of the timer (e.g., sprinklers, driveway, garden, pool,
etc.). The description appears on the timers schedule report and is listed
above the timer in the Timers view.

Type Select the interval of occurrence of the timer events: Daily, Weekly,
Monthly, or Yearly.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 151

Add a Timer Timers

If you select “Daily,” no additional fields appear. Set up the time and/or
duration (see page 153) of the event.

If you select “Weekly,” the following table appears:

Select each day of the week on which the timer event is to occur.

If you select “Monthly,” the following table appears:

Select each day of the month on which the timer event is to occur.

If you select “Yearly,” the following table appears:

152 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Timers Add a Timer

First select a month to be included in the schedule, then select each day of
that month on which the timer event is to occur. Do the same for each
month in which the timer event is to occur.

Time If the timer is based on a standard clock, enter the time each day that the
event is to begin. In the first box, type the hour (e.g., type 05 for five
o'clock,10 for ten o’clock, etc.). Click in the second box, and type the min-
utes after the hour (e.g., 05, 30, 45, etc.). Then click “am” or “pm.”

Sunrise/Sunset The LiteTouch controller supports timers based on astronomical time,

allowing you to link an event's starting time to sunrise or sunset seasonally
adjusted to the location. Astronomical time is based on your entries in the
Edit DST and Astronomical Settings dialog box (refer to “Edit DST and
Astronomical Settings” on page 165 for information).

Select Sunrise or Sunset. Then set up the time before or after sunrise or
sunset for the event to start using the following options:

Before/After
Indicate whether you want the event to start “before” or “after” sunrise
or sunset. If you want it to start right at sunrise/sunset, select either
one, and enter “00” in the “Time” boxes.

Time
Enter the number of hours and minutes before or after sunrise or sunset
that you want the timer event to begin.

For example, if you want the event to begin 30 minutes after sunset,
click Sunset, click After, enter 00 in the hour “Time” box, and enter 30
in the minute “Time” box. If you want the event to begin one hour 30
minutes before sunrise, click Sunrise, click Before, enter 01 in the hour
“Time” box, and enter 30 in the minute box.

Duration
If you are setting up a timer for an On/Off function, you can use the
“Duration” field to define the length of the event, or you can create a
second timer to end the event (e.g., use the On function to turn lights
on at sunset and the Off function to turn lights off at sunrise).

NOTE ☞ To deselect sunrise or sunset, click “am” or “pm.”

Duration (Applies to On/Off and User functions only) Enter the duration of the
event in hours and minutes. If, for example, the event is to last two hours,
thirty minutes, type 02 in the first box and 30 in the second box.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 153

Add a Timer Timers

Programming Click the Programming tab to select the function of the timer. The function
determines the action performed when the timer turns on or off. Refer to
Tab the sections under “5000LC” below for information on timer functions for
the 5000LC CCU. Refer to “Standard/Compact” on page 158 for informa-
tion on timer functions for the Standard or Compact CCU.

5000LC At the “Function” field, click and select a function from the drop-down
list. The options available in the Programming tab vary with the function
selected. Most functions require minimal configuration, while others, such
as “User,” typically require special programming.

NOTE ☞ Most functions require that a load group be assigned to the timer. The Load
Group tab is used to create or edit load groups. Refer to “Load Group Tab
(5000 LC)” on page 159 for information.

The following sections describe each available function on the 5000LC

and the parameters used to define it.

Off The Off function represents a discreet “off” value. This function is paired
with the On function. The timer for the On function turns the load group
on; the timer for the Off function turns it off.

When you select the Off function, the following options are displayed in
the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
selected load group are listed.

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for the function.

On The On function represents a discreet “on” value. This function is paired

with the Off function. The timer for the On function turns the load group
on; the timer for the Off function turns it off.

154 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Timers Add a Timer

When you select the On function, the following options are displayed in
the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
selected load group are listed.

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for the function.

On/Off The On/Off function represents discreet on and off values. At the desig-
nated time, the timer turns the load group on. At the end of the specified
duration, the timer turns the load group off.

When you select the On/Off function, the following options are displayed
in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
selected load group are listed.

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for the function.

Scene On The Scene On function is used to define a scene that can be turned on
(fades on to scene levels) but cannot be turned off with the same timer.
The scene must be turned off using a different timer or switch.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 155

Add a Timer Timers

When you select the Scene On function, the following options are dis-
played in the Programming tab.

Load Group Click and select a load group from the drop-down list. The loads in the
selected load group are listed.

LED Invert Select this option if you want to reverse the LED action for the function.

User The User function is used to create a program with custom (user) instruc-
tions. A user program can be as simple or as complex as you require and
can execute any action (or series of actions) supported by the CCU.

You can assign a User function to a timer or switch. When assigned to a

timer, it can execute separate instructions for the timer’s start (timer begin)
or stop (timer end) actions. (A stop action is not executed unless a duration
is specified.) When assigned to a switch, the user program can execute
separate instructions for press, hold, or release actions.

156 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Timers Add a Timer

When you select the User function, the following options are displayed in
the Programming tab.

Event Select the event to be executed by the program, Timer Begin or Timer End.

The remaining options are used to create the user program. The program is
then displayed in the Program box. For instructions, refer to Chapter 12,
“5000LC Programming” beginning on page 177.

The [Get Macro] button is used to import a macro program. A macro is a

file containing a pre-defined program. For information on macros, refer to
Chapter 13, “5000LC Macros” on page 201.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 157

Add a Timer Timers

Standard/Compact To program a timer for a Standard/Compact CCU, at the “Function” field,

click and select Timer Actions from the drop-down list. The following
dialog box is displayed.

You define events for each timer. Each event has an on or off action. How-
ever, rather than selecting a load group for each event, you select a switch,
and the action applies to the load or loads associated with the switch. So
each event consists of an action assigned to a switch.

Do the following to add an event to a timer:

1. At the “Select Event” field, click and select either Switch Loads Off
or Switch Loads On.

2. At the “Select Switch” field, click and select the switch that you
want to assign to the action. The loads associated with the switch will
be turned on or off at the specified time.

3. Click [Add Event] to add the event to the list.

4. In the same manner, continue to add events to the timer as required.

To remove an event from the list, click the event in the list to select it, then
click [Remove Event].

158 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Timers Add a Timer

Load Group Load groups are assigned to timer functions for the 5000LC only. (You
select events and switches for timers on Standard and Compact CCUs;
Tab (5000 LC) refer to “Standard/Compact” on page 158.) A load group is a group of
loads (and their parameters) used together in one timer. LiteWare 3.6 uses
load groups to make load management easier. A load group may consist of
a single load, several loads, or all loads in the load list. In addition, a load
may belong to any number of load groups, and one load group can be
assigned to more than one timer.

Click the Load Group tab to create or edit a load group.

Add a Load Group Do the following to add a new load group:

1. If you have not yet created any load groups, “NoLoadGroup” is

selected at the “Load Group” field. If you have created load groups,
and you want to create a load group similar to an existing one, click
and select the load group from the drop-down list, or select
“NoLoadGroup” if you want to start with an “empty” load group. Type
over the selected load group name to enter a new load group name.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 159

Add a Timer Timers

NOTE ☞ Load group names can be up to 49 characters long. When the job is converted
to a program file for upload to the CCU, load group names are truncated to 15
characters (for the 5000LC only). LiteWare 3.6 automatically creates unique
load group names of 15 characters.

NOTE ☞ If you make changes to an existing load group (without changing the name),
you change it for all switches and timers in the database to which it has been
assigned. If you do not want to change the existing load group, make sure you
type a new name.

2. All loads that have not yet been assigned to the load group are listed in
the “Unassigned Loads” box. Use the scroll bar on the right to move
through the load list. To assign a single load to the load group, click
the load to select it, then click [Assign], or double-click the load. To
select several consecutive loads, press and hold <Shift>, then click
the first and last loads in the group you want to select. To select several
non-consecutive loads, press and hold <Ctrl>, then click each load
that you want to select. The load or loads are added to the “Assigned
Loads” list.

To assign all unassigned loads to the load group, click [Assign All].

NOTE ☞ To change the order in which either list of loads is sorted, click a column head-
ing (e.g., Load, Description, ID, etc.) to sort alphabetically or numerically by
the items in the column. Click once to sort in ascending order; click again to
sort in descending order.

3. To remove a load from the “Assigned Loads” list, click it to select it

and then click [Unassign]. To unassign all loads from the load group,
click [Unassign All].

4. Set the ramp time, dimmer levels, fade levels, and preset/minimum
turn-on levels for the loads as required. Refer to the next section for
information.

Set Parameters After you assign the loads to a load group, you can change the default
ramp time, dim levels, fade levels, and preset/minimum turn-on levels for
the loads as required. Though the parameters for a load group will vary
depending on the function, possible parameters include:

• ramp time for the load group

• minimum turn on/preset level per load
• minimum dim level per load

160 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Timers Add a Timer

• maximum dim level per load

• fade on time per load
• fade off time per load

NOTE ☞ If you change the parameters for a load group, they are changed for all
switches and timers to which the load group is assigned. If you require the
same loads with different parameters, you must create a new load group.

Ramp Time (Dimmer function only) Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that it will
take to go from the minimum dim level to the maximum dim level (and
vice versa). This setting applies to all loads in the load group. The mini-
mum and maximum levels for each load are entered in the assigned load
list.

The following parameters are in columns in the “Assigned Loads” box. To

edit a parameter, click in the parameter’s table cell for the load you want to
edit, then click again to get an edit box and cursor. (To see a complete col-
umn heading, click on the border between column headings, hold down
the mouse button, and drag the column border.)

Description The load description is displayed. You can change it here if necessary.

ID The assigned load address is displayed for reference and cannot be

changed.

Preset Level/Minimum Turn- If the load group is for a scene, enter the preset level (where 0 is no light
On Level and 100 is full brightness). For other functions, enter the minimum turn-on
level for the load. Normally a load will turn on to the last known level, but
if the last level is lower than the minimum entered here, this value will be
used instead.

Minimum (Dimmer function only) Enter the minimum dim value for the load when
ramping.

Maximum (Dimmer function only) Enter the maximum dim value for the load when
ramping.

Fade On Enter the number of seconds that the fade-on should last. This is the time
from initial “turn on” until the preset, last known, or minimum turn-on
level is reached.

Fade Off Enter the number of seconds that the fade-off should last. This is the time
from the “on” state to the “off” state.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 161

Add a Timer Timers

[Set Column] To set a parameter to the same value for all loads in the load group, enter
the parameter’s value in the table, then click [Set Column].

[Set All] To set all parameters to the same values for all loads in the load group,
enter all parameters’ values for one load. Then, with that load selected,
click [Set All].

Timer/Switch Click [Switches] to display information about the association between

Information loads, load groups, and triggers. You can do the following:

• View the loads and triggers (switches and timers) used by a load group
• Identify all load groups to which a load belongs and which triggers use
the load (see “All Loads” on the next page)
• List all loads assigned to load groups
• List all loads not assigned to load groups

You can use this information to identify all load groups, to identify the
triggers associated with a load before removing it from the load group or
editing its parameters, and to identify empty load groups, all unassigned
loads, and so on. The Switches dialog box is shown below.

162 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Timers Edit a Timer

Load Group Click and select one of the following from the drop-down list:

One load group:

If you select a specific load group, the “Assigned Loads” box lists the
loads in the load group. The “Assigned Triggers” box lists any triggers
(switches or timers) that use the load group.

All Loads:
If you select All Loads, the “Assigned Loads” box lists all loads in the
job. Click a load, and the “Assigned Triggers” box lists any triggers
(switches or timers) that use the selected load. The “Assigned Load
Groups” box lists all load groups that include the selected load.

Loads Assigned to Load Groups:

If you select Loads Assigned to Load Groups, the “Assigned Loads”
box lists all loads that have been assigned to a load group.

Loads Not Assigned to Load Groups:

If you select Loads Not Assigned to Load Groups, the “Assigned
Loads” box lists all loads that have NOT been assigned to a load
group.

Click [OK] when you are finished viewing information to return to the
Timer Properties dialog box.

Edit a Timer
To edit a timer, right-click the timer (a selected timer has a yellow border),
and select Edit from the shortcut menu. The Timer Properties dialog box is
displayed. Refer to the previous section, “Add a Timer” beginning on
page 151, for information on the options.

Copy a Timer
If you want to add a timer that is similar to an existing timer, you can make
a copy of the existing timer to use as a starting point to create the new
timer.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 163

Delete a Timer Timers

Right-click on the timer to be copied and select Copy from the shortcut
menu. Right-click outside the timer in the blue background area and select
Paste from the shortcut menu. The new timer is pasted at the end of the list
of timers.

The new timer is given the same name as the copied timer but with the
words “copy of” added. Edit the new timer as required.

Delete a Timer
To delete a timer, click the timer to select it (a selected timer has a yellow
border). Click the [Delete Timer] button, or right-click the timer and select
Delete from the shortcut menu. The following message is displayed.

Click [Yes] to delete the timer or [No] if you do not want the timer deleted.

To select multiple timers for deletion, press and hold the <Ctrl> key and
click each timer that you want to delete. All selected timers are outlined
with yellow. Click the [Delete Timer] button, or right-click and select
Delete from the shortcut menu. A message asks if you really want to
delete the selected items (the number of items is shown). Click [Yes] to
delete the timers.

Print a Timer Schedule

A timer schedule is a report that lists, in a table format, the description,
function, load group, load number, address, levels, and timer specifica-
tions for each timer.

164 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Timers Edit DST and Astronomical Settings

To print a timer schedule for the job, click on the toolbar, or select
Print from the File menu. Click on the toolbar, or select Print Preview
from the File menu, to view the report before printing it.

To print a schedule for one timer, right-click on the timer, and select Print
from the shortcut menu.

To print schedules for two or more timers, hold down the <Ctrl> key and
click each timer that you want to select. All selected timers are outlined
with yellow. Right-click and select Print from the shortcut menu.

When you select Print, a standard Windows Print dialog box is displayed.
If necessary, select the printer and specify the page range and number of
copies. Click [OK] to print the schedule.

Edit DST and Astronomical Settings

The [Edit DST and Astro...] button in the Timer view is used to open a dia-
log box to set up the following:

• Daylight savings time (5000LC only)

• Time zone
• Longitude/latitude for the astronomical timer

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 165

Edit DST and Astronomical Settings Timers

Click [Edit DST and Astro...] and the following dialog box is displayed.

Daylight Use the following options to set up daylight savings time on the 5000LC
CCU so that your timers will automatically change to daylight savings
Savings (5000LC) time settings when applicable.

NOTE ☞ The Standard and Compact CCUs do not adjust automatically to DST. You can
turn daylight savings time on or off manually in the CCU Global Settings dialog
box in Job Parameters (see “Switch/LED Invert,” “Daylight Savings” on
page 52 for information).

Start In the first box, click and select the month that daylight savings time
begins. In the second box, click and select whether daylight savings
time begins on the “first,” “last,” “second,” “third,” or “fourth” specified
day of the week in the selected month. In the third box, click and select
the day of the week on which daylight savings starts.

Stop In the first box, click and select the month that daylight savings time
ends. In the second box, click and select whether daylight savings time
ends on the “first,” “last,” “second,” “third,” or “fourth” specified day of
the week in the selected month. In the third box, click and select the
day of the week on which daylight savings ends.

166 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Timers Edit DST and Astronomical Settings

Time Change to Occur At Enter the hour at which the change to daylight savings time occurs. For
example, enter 2 and 00 and click AM for 2:00 a.m.

Example:
In the United States, DST starts on the first Sunday in April at 2:00 a.m.
and ends on the last Sunday in October at 2:00 a.m., so your setup should
be as follows:

NOTE ☞ If you have a timer setting within one hour of this time, you need to adjust the
time change parameter so the timer is not affected when the time automatically
adjusts.

Time Zone From the drop-down list, select the correct time zone. The hours of differ-
ence between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and each time zone are
(All CCUs) shown. With GMT at “00:00,” the eleven time zones west of GMT, which
include those in the United States, are GMT -01:00 to -12:00; time zones
east of GMT are GMT +01:00 to +11:00. The International Date Line is at
-12:00, with +11:00 to the west of it and -11:00 to the east of it.

Astronomical The CCU employs an astronomical clock/calendar that can be used to turn
system loads on or off at sunrise or sunset and can adjust automatically to
(All CCUs) the seasons. You must enter your latitude and longitude to set up the astro-
nomical clock/calendar.

Latitude Click and select the latitude. For example, Salt Lake City, Utah is 40°
north latitude.

Longitude Click and select the longitude. For example, Salt Lake City, Utah is
112° west longitude.

Test Date To test the calculated sunrise and sunset time, select a date and the calcu-
lated sunrise and sunset times are displayed so you can compare them to
known times. This can be useful if you are setting up timers based on sun-
rise/sunset times.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 167

Edit DST and Astronomical Settings Timers

The current date is selected as a default. Click to display a calendar

from which you can select any date, as shown below.

DST in Test
Indicate whether you want Daylight Savings Time used in calculating
the test date sunrise and sunset times. Select Use or Don’t Use.

Test Sunrise
Test Sunset
The calculated sunrise and sunset times for the selected date are dis-
played.

Show Vacation The Vacation function on the 5000LC is controlled by timers. When you
set up a Vacation function, LiteWare 3.6 creates timers to start and stop the
Mode Timers specified actions. Select this option to view the timers. Be aware that sev-
eral timers are typically required to control a Vacation function.
(5000LC)

NOTE ☞ Do not edit the timers for a Vacation function, edit the time periods for the
Vacation function in the Switch Properties dialog box (see “Edit a Switch” on
page 107).

168 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Billing 11

This chapter provides information on the functions performed in the Bill-

ing view. You can create a bill of materials in the Billing view at any point
in the job. You can have LiteWare 3.6 generate the bill based on the com-
ponents used in the job, or you can manually create a bill of materials.

The bill of materials may include the following:

• Any items listed in the Add Item “Part Name” drop-down list, which
includes all LiteTouch components and services
• Other items or charges that are part of the job but are not supplied by
LiteTouch

All LiteTouch components and services are based on the LiteTouch list
price using the price adjustment factor that you specify. You enter the
prices of non-LiteTouch components directly.

Click [Billing] on the view selection bar to view, generate, or edit a bill of
materials. A Password prompt is displayed each time you select the Bill-
ing view until you enter your pricing password. You can access the Billing
view without a password, however, the password determines whether or
not pricing is displayed. Your password is assigned by your LiteTouch
sales representative.

If you know the password, type it and click [OK]. Once you enter the pass-
word correctly, this prompt does not appear again.

If you do not know the password, click [OK] to proceed. You can generate
a bill of materials, but all pricing and totals will show a zero value.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 169

 Billing

The Billing view is displayed.

Before calculating a bill, click [Billing Preferences] to set the “Price Adjust-
ment Factor” that you want to use (refer to the next page). Then do one or
both of the following:

• Have LiteWare 3.6 generate the bill (see “Create Billing from Job” on
page 172).
• Enter all or some items manually (see “Add Item” on page 174).

170 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Billing Billing Preferences

Billing Preferences
Click the [Billing Preferences] button to set the price adjustment factor and
add a billing description. The following dialog box is displayed.

Price Adjustment Factor (Only appears if a password was entered.) The default entry of “1.0000”
represents LiteTouch's list price. You can change the factor to reflect your
or your customer's cost, if necessary (e.g., 1.50000 is 150% of list price;
0.500 is 50% of list price, and so on). Enter a value of “0.000” to disable
pricing after your password has been entered.

Printing This selection determines the pricing information to appear on printed

bills of material. Select Show Itemized Pricing if you want “Unit Price” and
“Extended Price” columns included in the bill (“Extended Price” is the
same as the “Total $” column in the Billing view). Select Show Total if you
want the total amount for the bill of materials added to the end of the
report.

Export If you want to be able to export the bill of materials file to LiteWare 2.xx,
select LW2XX Compatible. If not selected, the file is LiteWare 3.x compati-
ble only.

Billing Description Enter a description of the billing and any notes about the billing as desired.

Click [OK] to set the price adjustment factor and exit the dialog box.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 171

Create Billing from Job Billing

Create Billing from Job

You can have LiteWare 3.6 automatically generate the bill of materials,
and you can edit or add to it after it is generated.

Click [Create Billing from Job] and a list of materials used in the job is gen-
erated and displayed in the Billing view, as shown below. (You must enter
your billing password to see prices.)

The generated bill of materials shows the part name, number, and descrip-
tion (if entered). If a password was entered, it also shows the price based
on the quantity ordered, the total cost per part number, and the price
adjustment factor, as well as a “Grand Total” at the bottom of the list.

NOTE ☞ Select “Yes” in the “Custom” column to indicate items that you entered manu-
ally or priced manually. (Click twice in the column and select from the drop-
down list.) Any item marked “Yes” in the “Custom” column will not be deleted,
updated, or overwritten by LiteWare when a new billing is generated unless you

172 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Billing Create Billing from Job

specify it. If you manually change a price on an item, the “Custom” entry
changes to “Yes” by default. All custom items must be updated manually.

Use the vertical scroll bar on the right to move through the list.

Refer to “Add Item” on page 174 for information on adding an item to the
bill of materials. Refer to “Edit Item” on page 175 for information on edit-
ing an item.

Update Bill of If you have an existing bill of materials and you want to create a new one
based on updated components, click [Create Billing from Job] again. The
Materials following dialog box is displayed.

Add New Items to List Select this option if you want to retain all items on the existing bill of
materials and add auto-generated items to the end.

Delete Auto Generated Items (Default) Select this option if you want to delete all auto-generated items
and Add New Items to List from the list but retain any manually entered or priced items. Manually
entered items are determined by the entry in the “Custom” column. If the
entry is “Yes,” the item will not be deleted; if “No,” the item will be
deleted.

Delete All Items and Select this option if you want to delete all entries in the existing list and
Add New Items to List replace them with the new, auto-generated list. Even items with a “Yes” in
the “Custom” column are deleted.

Click [OK] to proceed, or click [Cancel] to cancel the operation and retain
the existing bill of materials.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 173

Add Item Billing

Add Item
To add an item to the list, click [Add Item] and the following dialog box is
displayed.

NOTE ☞ Items that you add to the bill of materials manually are given a custom status
of “Yes” by default. If you do not want the item to be treated as a custom item,
select No in the “Custom” cell for the item.

Part Category Click and select a category of LiteTouch items (e.g., modules, enclo-
sures, CCU, etc.) from which to select an item.

If you are adding a non-LiteTouch item, select a part. Click [OK] to add the
line to the bottom of the bill of materials. Refer to “Edit Item” on page 175
for instructions on editing the information.

You can select the item by part name or part number. If you select a part
name, the part number is entered automatically; if you select a part num-
ber, the part name is entered automatically.

Part Name Click and select the part name in the selected category.

Part Number Click and select the part number in the selected category.

Click [OK] to add the item to the list. For instructions on adding quantities
and editing item prices and descriptions, refer to “Edit Item” on the next
page.

174 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Billing Edit Item

Edit Item
To edit the information in any cell in the bill of materials table, double-
click in the cell. The cell entry is highlighted; type the new information, or
select an item from the drop-down list.

NOTE ☞ Making a change to a bill of materials item changes the status of the item to
“custom” (by adding “Yes” in the “Custom” column). Custom entries can be
retained when regenerating the bill of materials using the [Create Billing from
Job] function (see “Create Billing from Job” on page 172). However, they must
be manually updated.

Unit Price If you added an item to the list manually (using the [Add Item] function),
you may want to edit the unit price for the item. After entering the price,
press <Tab> or click in a different field, and the total price for the item is
automatically calculated.

Qty Enter the quantity of the part if other than one. Press <Tab> or click in a
different field, and the total price for the item is automatically calculated.

Delete Item
Do the following to delete one or more items from the list:

1. Use the scroll bar on the right to move through the list and find the
item you want to delete.

2. To select a single item, click it. To select several consecutive items,

press and hold <Shift>, then click the first and last items in the group
you want to delete. To select several non-consecutive items, press and
hold <Ctrl>, then click each item that you want to select.

3. Click [Delete Item(s)] to remove the item or items from the list.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 175

Print Bill of Materials Billing

Print Bill of Materials

A printed bill of materials contains all of the information in the Billing
view. The name of the job and date the report was printed are included in
the header.

To print a bill of materials, click on the toolbar, or select Print from the
File menu. Click on the toolbar, or select Print Preview from the File
menu, to view the bill of materials before printing it.

When you select Print, a standard Windows Print dialog box is displayed.
If necessary, select the printer and specify the page range and number of
copies. Click [OK] to print the schedule.

176 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 5000LC Programming 12

This chapter provides instructions for creating custom programs for the
5000LC in LiteWare 3.6. A custom program is used to send specialized
instructions to the 5000LC that cannot be accomplished using standard
LiteWare 3.6 functions and features. LiteWare 3.6 5000LC custom pro-
grams are called “user programs.”

A user program is a customized response to a trigger called a system event.

A system event may include any of the following:

• Pressing a button (switch press)

• Holding a button (switch hold)
• Releasing a button (switch release)
• Matching a timer's start time (timer begin)
• Matching a timer’s end time (timer end)
• Entering a combination code (user event)
• Starting or restarting the CCU (startup or initialization)

User Function A function is the response to a system event. When an event occurs, such
as pressing a button, the system responds by executing the function. There
are several predefined functions, (e.g., Dimmer function, Combination
function, Momentary function, Toggle (On) and (Off), etc.). You can pro-
gram the User function with any response supported by the LiteTouch sys-
tem.

When programming a switch, you can write an independent set of instruc-

tions for three separate switch actions: press, hold, or release. When pro-
gramming a timer, you can write separate instructions for the timer begin
and timer end actions. The timer end action will only be executed when
the specified duration is not zero.

A User function is selected for a switch or timer by selecting “User” from

the “Function” drop-down list in the Switch/Timer Properties dialog box
(refer to “Edit a Switch,” “User (5000LC)” on page 129 or “Add a Timer,”
“User” on page 156).

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 177

Programming Basics 5000LC Programming

User Event A user event is a system event that triggers a program containing the
instructions executed when a combination code is entered at a switch
assigned a Combination function. Only a Combination function can start a
user event. A user event’s program may be as simple or as complex as you
require and is capable of executing any action (or series of actions) sup-
ported by the 5000LC CCU.

A Combination function is selected from the “Function” drop-down list in

the Switch Properties dialog box (refer to “Edit a Switch,” “Combination
(5000LC)” on page 110).

Startup Event You can set up a startup event to execute a user program when the 5000LC
is started or restarted. A startup event is not required for a job. If a startup
event is not set up, the CCU uses the last known settings at startup. If the
CCU is powered off and cards are changed, the last known settings are
lost, and the system starts with the current load settings. However, the
LED status may be incorrect until a button is pressed on each keypad.

When a startup event is defined, the system always uses it to set certain
initialized settings—not necessarily the last known setting—for loads,
LEDs, and so on.

A startup event is set up in the Parameters view (refer to “Startup Event”

on page 46).

Programming Basics
A LiteWare 3.6 user program is a group of instructions written in a lan-
guage that the 5000LC can understand. This section provides basic infor-
mation and rules for writing a user program. User programs are written for
a User function, a user event program, or a startup event program.

178 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Programming Programming Basics

The options for the User function are shown below.

The options and fields used to create the user program are the same for all
three programs (user event, startup event, and User function) though each
dialog box is selected differently and has a different title bar. Refer to
“User Program Options” on page 189 for information on the options.

Program A program function defines an action for a load or load group and in some
instances switches, timers, or keypads. Using program functions, you can
Functions control any aspect of a lighting control system. Each program function
applies to a specific load or load group, switch, timer, or keypad. Exam-
ples of program functions include the following:

• SetLoadsOn (i.e., set loads on for the load group)

• SetLoadsOff (i.e., set loads off for the load group)
• ToggleLoadsOn (i.e., toggle loads on; same as Toggle(On)
• ToggleLoadsOff (i.e., toggle loads off; same as Toggle(Off)
• StartRamp (i.e., start ramp; to start dimming)
• StopRamp (i.e., stop ramp; to stop dimming)

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 179

Programming Basics 5000LC Programming

Program functions typically describe an action involving a specific load,

load group, or LED. Two common actions include: “get” (getting a value
or the state of a load or LED) and “set” (setting a load, LED etc., to a value
or state).

When creating a program, you select both the program function and the
load/load group/LED from drop-down lists. All program functions are
listed and explained beginning on page 194.

The Stack The stack is where values are stored. For example, you can use the “Get-
LoadLevel” function to find the level of a specified load. The information
retrieved is then placed on the stack.

If you bring another value to the stack, it is stacked on top of the previous
value, but the previous value remains on the stack.

When you use one of the “get” functions, the requested value is retrieved
and placed on top of the stack. When you use some “set” or “if” functions
(explained later), the value at the top of the stack is used.

Normally, you only need to be concerned with the value at the top of the
stack. However, when doing arithmetic functions, values below the top
value on the stack may also be used.

Query/Change Most programs include a query (getting information about a load, load
group, or LED) and instructions for what to do with the information
System Values retrieved. The following program segment shows an example of this:

GetLoadValue(loadID1, groupID1)
SetLoadValue(loadID2, groupID2)

In this program, the “GetLoadValue” function reads the load level identi-
fied as “1” in the specified group and places the value on the stack. The
“SetLoadValue” function takes that value and uses it to set the load level
for the load identified as “2” in the specified group.

Arithmetic In addition to program functions, you can type in commands, operators,

and values. You can change the value of numbers on the stack using sim-
Functions ple arithmetic operations. The most commonly used operations are addi-
tion and subtraction. In the following example, the program enters the
equivalent of 5 + 2 = 7:

180 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Programming Programming Basics

enter(5)
enter(2)
add

In this operation, the first “enter” places the number 5 at the top of the
stack. In the second line, “enter” is used again to place the number 2 at the
top of the stack. The “add” command adds the top two numbers on the
stack and replaces both numbers with the sum of the two. So the top value
on the stack becomes 7, and the 5 and 2 are no longer on the stack.

In the following example, the program enters the equivalent of 10 – 3 = 7:

enter(10)
enter(3)
sub

In this operation, “enter” places the number 10 on the stack, and then
places the number 3 on the stack. The “sub” command subtracts the 3
from the 10 and replaces both numbers with 7.

More commonly, you would use arithmetic expressions to change a value

that was brought to the stack using one of the “get” functions, as shown in
the following example:

GetLoadLevel(loadID1)
enter(20)
add
SetLoadValue(loadID1, groupID1)

This operation reads the load level for load ID 1 and places the value on
the stack. It then places the number twenty on the stack and adds the two
values together, replacing both numbers with the result. It then changes the
load level for load ID 1 in group ID 1 to the new value.

Another example:

GetLoadLevel(loadid1)
GetLoadLevel(loadid2)
add
SetLoadValue(loadID3, groupID3)

This operation adds the values of load ID 1 and 2 and sets the value of load
ID 3 in group ID 3 to the resulting sum.

Other available arithmetic operators are described in “Arithmetic Opera-

tors and Commands” on page 198.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 181

Programming Basics 5000LC Programming

State and The LiteWare 3.6 programming language defines global variables and a
state variable for each user program.
Global
A state variable is a local variable specific to one user program. While the
Variables program is being executed, it can be set to any numeric value using the
“setstate(x)” command (where x is the value given the state variable).
When the program is terminated, so is the state variable. Upon execution,
a state variable resets to zero and remains zero until it is changed.

A global variable is unique in that it is system-wide and user-defined. All

programs on a CCU can reference the same global variable, thus allowing
you to pass information (a value) from one program to another. The “set-
global(ID,val)” command is used to initialize a section of memory for the
variable and create an identifier for it. You define the ID when you first
create the global variable. From that point on, it can be referenced from
any program that uses the global variable’s ID.

A global variable contains a value. This value is stored in the global vari-
able's memory when the “setglobal(ID,val)” command is used. When exe-
cuted, this command sets the global variable to the specified value (val) in
memory. You can then use the “getglobal(id)” command to retrieve the
value and place it on the stack. Because it is a global variable, it can be
queried by any program on the CCU, and it will give the same value to all
programs that query it. The value can be changed as necessary using the
“setglobal(ID,val)” command.

Any number of global variables can be created, but remember that each
one occupies memory.

In the following example, a global variable is created with the identifier

10. It contains a value of 42, which can be passed to any program that uses
the “getglobal(10)” command.

setglobal(10, 42)
term

Start and Stop A program begins running when its triggering mechanism is executed.
Any of the following will trigger a program to execute:
the Program
• Startup event: when the CCU is powered on or reset
• User event: when the assigned combination code is entered
• User function: when the specified switch receives the triggering action
(press, hold, or release) or when the timer is activated (timer begin/end)

182 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Programming Programming Basics

When a program is executed, the CCU opens an interpreter, which acts as

a mini-processor, to run the program. Each interpreter has its own stack, so
you do not need to be concerned about other programs changing the cur-
rent stack value. The interpreter reads a program one statement at a time in
sequential order.

A program stops when the interpreter reads the “term” (termination) com-
mand. The “term” command stops the program and closes the interpreter.
To stop a program but not terminate it, you can use the “end” command.
As a rule, you will want to terminate most programs when they are fin-
ished to free up CCU resources. Interpreters also stop when a reset occurs
or during a program upload.

Program Each statement or command in a program must be placed on a single line.

Do not place multiple commands or statements on the same line. Also, no
Syntax spaces can be used in a statement.

The following examples show incorrect and correct ways to enter program
statements.

Incorrect:
GetLoadLevel(loadID) enter(30) sub

Correct:
GetLoadLevel(loadID)
enter(30)
sub

Incorrect:
SetLoadsOn(groupID) term

Correct:
SetLoadsOn(groupID)
term

Incorrect:
if (stack = 1)

Correct:
if(stack=1)

Incorrect:
Set Load Levels (xxx)

Correct:
SetLoadLevels(xxx)

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 183

Programming Basics 5000LC Programming

When setting up a program function, always select the function from the
“Functions” drop-down list. This makes certain that the statement is
entered correctly.

When typing commands and arithmetic operations, use lower case letters
and never use spaces in the statements.

Add Comments to a You can add comments to a program to help clarify or explain a function
Program or action. Comments do not affect the program or initiate any action.
Comments can also be useful if someone else will be installing the pro-
gram, especially if a problem or error occurs. Comments in the program
can help the installer determine what the program or statement is supposed
to do.

A comment is always preceded with a semicolon (;). It can follow a com-

mand, or it can be on a line by itself. For example:

GetLoadLevel(loadID1)
GetLoadLevel(loadID2)
add ;adds the values of load 1 and 2
SetLoadValue(loadID3, groupID3)
;takes the result to set the value of load 3 in load group 3

The semicolon tells the interpreter to ignore the line. If a comment wraps
to a second line or more, place a semicolon at the beginning of each line.
A semicolon must precede each line that you want the interpreter to
ignore. Comment lines can be placed anywhere in a program.

Conditional A conditional statement is used to present a condition for which the pro-
gram’s response depends on whether the statement is true or false. If the
Statements statement is true, a specific action is performed; if it is false, a different
action is performed.

Conditional statements contain an “if” command and a conditional value.

The following is an example of a conditional statement:

GetLoadState(loadID)
if(stack=0)
{
SetLoadsOn(groupID)
}
term

184 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Programming Programming Basics

In this example, the program first instructs the interpreter to identify the
state of the load. If the load is off, the conditional statement is true
(stack=0), and the interpreter reads the “nested statement” that follows and
turns the loads in a group on. A nested statement is enclosed in brackets {
} (on separate lines) and contains the action to be taken if the conditional
statement is true. If the statement is false, the interpreter skips over the
nested statement and interprets the statement immediately following the
nested statement. In the example, if the load is already on, the conditional
statement is false, so the interpreter skips the nested statement and reads
the “term” command, ending the program.

Following is a program showing two conditional statements:

GetLoadState(groupID)
if(stack=1)
{
SetLoadsOff(groupID)
term
}
GetLEDState(switchID)
if(stack=0)
{
SetLoadsOn(groupID)
term
}
term

This program instructs the interpreter to get the state of the specified load.
If the load is on, it turns the load group off. If it is off, it checks the LED
state. If the LED state is off, it turns the group on.

The following program simulates a dimmer function. The program con-

sists of three sets of instructions, the first is linked to switch press, the sec-
ond to switch hold, and the third to switch release. In the dialog box, the
part of the program that pertains to each action (press/hold/release) is
entered separately. To help you understand how it works, the full program
is shown below, separated by action to show how it was written:

Switch press programming:

setstate(0)
end

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 185

Programming Basics 5000LC Programming

Switch hold programming:

setstate(1)
StartRamp(groupID)
end

Switch release programming:

if(state=1)
{
StopRamp(groupID)
term
}
ToggleLoadsOn(loadID)
term

When the switch is pressed, the interpreter is opened and the state variable
is set to 0. Then the interpreter waits. If the switch is held, the load begins
to ramp. When the switch is released, there are two possible actions: if the
switch was held, the ramping is stopped and the program is terminated; if
the switch was not held, the load group is toggled (with “on” priority if in
an indeterminate state) and the program is terminated. A more complex
version of this program is shown in “Dimmer” on page 209.

Conditional When testing the condition of the stack or the state variable, conditional
values such as (stack=1) or (state=0) are specified. Other operators are
Values available in addition to “equals” (=). Possible conditional values include
any of the following. All operators can be used with either a stack or state
value. “x” represents the test value that you enter.

(stack=x) stack is equal to value

(stack<x) stack is less than the value

(stack>x) stack is greater than the value

(stack<=x) stack is less than or equal to the value

(stack>=x) stack is greater than or equal to the value

(stack<>x) stack is greater than or less than the value

(not equal to)

186 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Programming Programming Basics

Loops A loop is a statement that instructs the interpreter to begin reading the pro-
gram again from the top of the loop. If the loop contains one or more
nested statements, it finishes reading the nested statement(s) before start-
ing again from the top of the loop.

A loop can be a useful addition to a program, enabling the interpreter to

respond to earlier program statements after later statements may have
changed the value of the stack, state variable, or global variable.

When writing a loop, you need to make certain that you include one or
more termination commands and that they are placed where the interpreter
will eventually read one, otherwise the program loop may continue indefi-
nitely, effectively locking up the CCU.

Following is an example of an endless loop, one that can only be termi-

nated by rebooting the CCU or uploading the program:

enter(1)
loop(stack=1)
{
...
enter(1)
}
term

Even though the program includes a “term” command, the interpreter is

instructed to loop before it gets to the termination statement, causing the
program to loop indefinitely (unless the stack changes).

In the following example, a loop statement is used to rerun the program as

long as the load level is not 50%. If the load level is set to 50% at any time,
the program terminates. The program flashes the load group on and off (on
one second, off one second) until the load level is set to 50% from some
other source (button, timer, etc.).

GetLoadLevel(loadID1)
loop(stack<>50)
{
SetLoadsOn(groupD1)
wait(10)
SetLoadsOff(groupD1)
wait(10)
GetLoadLevel(loadID1)
}
term

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 187

Programming Basics 5000LC Programming

The following example creates a simple chase sequence that continues

until the button is pressed again. It assumes load groups 1, 2, 3, and 4 are
the load groups associated with the chase. There is a 5-second “on” time
for each group, at the end of which the group is turned off and the next
group is turned on. Load group 5 contains all the loads associated with the
other groups. Load group 5 is used to stop and turn off any loads that are
on. This program uses a state variable to determine if the loop is running.

if(state=1)
{
SetLoadsOff(5)
term
}
setstate(1)
loop(state=1)
{
SetLoadsOn(1)
wait(50)
SetLoadsOff(1)
SetLoadsOn(2)
wait(50)
SetLoadsOff(2)
SetLoadsOn(3)
wait(50)
SetLoadsOff(3)
SetLoadsOn(4)
wait(50)
SetLoadsOff(4)
}
term

The final “term” is added only in case the switch has an indeterminate
state. This should never happen, but if it does, the program terminates and
does nothing else. When the program is restarted, the state is always zero.

NOTE ☞ This switch program must be “reentrant” to work properly; otherwise it will
never stop. Refer to the next section for information on the “Reentrant”
option.

Reentrant The “Reentrant” option is used to determine what happens if a program is

restarted (switch pressed again) while it is still running. If Reentrant is
enabled (check box checked), the program starts over. If it is disabled, a
second interpreter opens and runs a copy of the program.

188 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Programming User Program Options

Generally, if timing is involved, you should use Reentrant; if timing is not

involved, you should not use Reentrant. However, there are exceptions.
Following is an example of a program that would not use Reentrant with a
timing function:

SetLoadsOn(groupID1)
wait(150)
SetLoadsOn(groupID2)
SetLoadsOff(groupID1)
wait(150)
SetLoadsOn(groupID3)
SetLoadsOff(groupID2)
wait(150)
SetLoadsOff(groupID3)
term

This program is a pathway sequence that lights a path as a person walks

through it, turning the lights off as they pass. If a second person enters the
pathway and starts the program before it has been completed for the first
person, if Reentrant is disabled, a second interpreter is opened, allowing
both to run the program concurrently; if Reentrant is enabled, the program
starts over for the second person, possibly before the first person has com-
pletely passed through the lighted area. For another example of a pathway
sequence refer to “Pathway Sequence” on page 210.

User Program Options

User programs are written for a User function, user event, or startup event.

The options and fields used to create the user program are the same for all
three programs (user event, startup event, and User function) though each
dialog box is selected differently and has a different title bar.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 189

User Program Options 5000LC Programming

The options for the User function are shown below.

Create a User function for a switch by selecting User in the Switch Proper-
ties dialog box, Programming tab, “Function” drop-down list (refer to
“Edit a Switch” on page 107). Create a User function for a timer by select-
ing User in the Timer Properties dialog box, Programming tab, “Function”
drop-down list (refer to “Add a Timer” on page 151).

After you select the Combination function for a switch in the Switch Prop-
erties dialog box, Programming tab, “Function” drop-down list (refer to
“Edit a Switch” on page 107), click [Create Event] to create a user event in
the Combination Event dialog box.

Create a startup event in the Parameters view. Select the startup event from
the drop-down list at the “Startup Event” field, then click [Edit] to set up
the startup event in the Edit Startup Event dialog box.

(Step 1) Event When creating a user event or startup event, skip this field; these events
do not use this option.

190 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Programming User Program Options

When creating a User function for a switch, click , and select the trig-
ger event for the switch: Switch Press, Switch Hold, or Switch Release.

When creating a User function for a timer, click , and select the trig-
ger event for the timer: Timer Begin or Timer End.

NOTE ☞ You must always set up instructions for a “switch press” when you set up a
“switch hold” or “switch release” in order for them to work properly. If no
action is required, use “end.” For a timer, you must set up a “timer begin”
when you set up a “timer end.”

(Alternate Step) Macros are programming “shortcuts.” A macro is a file containing a pre-
defined program that you load into the Program box. You then specify the
[Get Macro] parameters for your design. Because it is a separate file, a macro can be
transferred between computers.

To enter a pre-defined program using a macro, click the [Get Macro] but-
ton. This accesses an Open dialog box used to import a macro file. For
more information on macros, refer to Chapter 13, “5000LC Macros” on
page 201.

(Step 2) The “Reentrant” option is available when programming user events and
User functions for switches. It does not apply when programming a startup
Reentrant event or User functions for timers. If the “Reentrant” option is not avail-
able, it is dimmed.

The “Reentrant” option is used to determine what happens if a program is

restarted (switch pressed again) while it is still running. If Reentrant is
enabled (check box checked), the program starts over. If it is disabled, a
second interpreter opens and runs a copy of the program.

Generally, if timing is involved, you should use Reentrant; if timing is not

involved, you should not use Reentrant. However, there are exceptions.
Refer to “Reentrant” on page 188 for more information.

(Step 3) In the “Functions” list, click to select the program function that you want
to use. “Load Group,” “Load,” “Station,” “Switch,” or “Timer” fields
Functions 1 appropriate to the selected function become available with drop-down lists
for you to select the load group, load, keypad, switch, or timer that you
want to program. For a complete list of program functions and descrip-

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 191

User Program Options 5000LC Programming

tions, refer to “Program Functions List” on page 194. For information on

arithmetic operators and commands, refer to page 198.

(Step 4) Select how you want the load groups, loads, keypads, switches, or timers
in the drop-down lists sorted. They can be listed in order by “Name” or
Sort Order “ID/Address.”

(Step 5) All program functions perform some kind of action on a load group, load,
keypad, switch, or timer. From the appropriate field’s drop-down list,
Load Group select the load or device to which the program function applies. You can-
not select a device that is not appropriate for the selected function.
Load
For most program functions, you will select a switch, load, or load group.
Station A timer is only selected if you are using the “Lock Timer” and “Unlock
Timer” functions.
Switch For functions that query a keypad, you need to select the keypad. Keypads
Timer are defined by gang. Keypad related functions include: “GetLEDStates”
and “GetValidSwitches.”

For more information, refer to “Program Functions List” on page 194.

(Step 6) To insert the function into the program after you have selected the load or
device, click [Add], or double-click the selected (highlighted) function.
Functions 2 The function and the group, load, keypad, switch, or timer identifier are
added to the Program box.

(Step 7) (User switch function only) The “LED Update” options apply to a switch
being programmed. They determine the LED action for the switch. Each
LED Update option is explained below:

None LED does not light

All Loads On LED lights only if all loads assigned to

the switch are on

All Loads Off LED lights when all loads are off

192 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Programming User Program Options

Any Loads On LED lights if any of the loads assigned

to the switch are on

Any Loads Off LED lights if any of the loads assigned

to the switch are off

Loads at Preset LED lights when loads are at preset levels

Loads Not at Preset LED lights when loads are not at preset levels

“Loads” refers to the load group assigned to the switch. Select “None” if
no automatic LED update is desired. The “SetLEDOn” and “SetLEDOff”
functions can be used for explicit LED set commands.

(Step 8) A program consists of a mixture of program functions, commands, and

operators carefully arranged into a set of instructions. If you have not
Program Box already read the section “Programming Basics” beginning on page 178,
you should read it before proceeding.

You write each program in the Program box, which is used much like an
embedded word processor. In the Program box, you can type characters,
edit existing text, delete characters and words, insert new lines, and use
standard Windows cut/copy/paste conventions.

Editing conventions include the following:

<Enter> insert a new line

<Delete> delete the character to the right of the cursor

location, or delete selected characters

<Backspace> delete the character to the left of the cursor

location

<Ctrl> z undo previous delete

<Ctrl> x cut blocked text

<Ctrl> c copy blocked text

<Ctrl> v paste the cut or copied text

Use the mouse or arrow keys to move or position the cursor.

Use <Shift> with the arrow keys (or click and drag the mouse) to block
text.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 193

Program Functions List 5000LC Programming

Save and Exit When you have finished creating or editing a program, click [OK] to save
the program and exit the dialog box. This returns you to the previous dia-
log box.

Click [Cancel] to exit a dialog box without saving.

Program Functions List

All program functions are listed below using the correct program syntax.
Select a program function from the “Functions” list box in the user pro-
gram dialog box. Use the other fields to identify the load group, load, key-
pad, switch, or timer.

GetLoadState(load) Queries whether the specified load is on (1) or off (0). The value (0 or 1) is
placed on the stack. If a scene is active that sets the load to zero, it will
also return (1).

GetLoadLevel(load) Queries for the current level (0 - 100) of the specified load. The value is
placed on the stack.

SetLoadsOn(group) Turns on the specified load group, either to the last known level or to the
minimum turn-on level, whichever is greater, using the load fade-on times
specified in the load group parameters.

SetLoadsOff(group) Turns off (or fades off) the specified load group.

SetLoadLevels(group) Sets the loads in the specified load group to the preset levels defined for
the group using the load fade-on times specified in the load group parame-
ters.

SetPrevLoadStates(group) Sets the loads of the specified load group to their previous states and lev-
els.

GetCurrentLevels(group) Retrieves the level of the loads for the specified group and saves them as
the new presets.

GetMinLevels(group) Retrieves the current level of the loads for the specified load group and
saves them as the new minimum dim levels.

GetMaxLevels(group) Retrieves the current level of the loads for the specified load group and
saves them as the new maximum dim levels.

194 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Programming Program Functions List

GetLoadValue(load,group) Queries the preset value of the specified load, as a member of the specified
group, and places the value on the stack.

SetLoadValue(load,group) Uses the value at the top of the stack to set the preset level for the specified
load in a specified load group.

GetLEDState(switch) Gets the current LED state of the specified switch (0 or 1) and places it on
the stack.

GetLEDStates(keypad) Gets the current LED states for all switches on a keypad and places them
on the stack as a bitmap code.

GetValidSwitches(keypad) Gets the current state of all switches on a keypad. All keypads have the
hardware for nine button positions even if fewer buttons are installed. This
function identifies which of the nine buttons have been programmed and
returns their state as a bitmap code.

For example, a return code of Hex 1FF (decimal 511, binary 111111111)
indicates that all nine switches are programmed; a return code of Hex 000
(decimal 000, binary 000000000) indicates that no switches are pro-
grammed; a return code of Hex 0AB (decimal 171, binary 010101011)
indicates that switches 1, 2, 4, 6, and 8 are programmed; a return code of
Hex 155 (decimal 341, binary 101010101) indicates that switches 1, 3, 5,
7, and 9 are programmed.

GetStaticByte(name) Returns to the stack the value stored at the named, non-volatile memory
location.

SetStaticByte(name) Puts the value on the stack into the named, non-volatile memory location.

GetStaticBit(name) Returns 1 or 0 to the stack based on the state of the named, non-volatile
memory location.

SetStaticBit(name) Sets the value at the named, non-volatile memory location to 1.

ClearStaticBit(name) Sets the value at the named, non-volatile memory location to 0.

SendSerialIn(port,string) Sends a string enclosed in quotation marks ("string") in or out the serial
SendSerialOut(port,string) port. Use the following conventions with this function:

Any ASCII character except the following sequences:

"\\" inserts a single backslash “\”

\xNN inserts a hex NN where NN is any combination of hex digits
EXCEPT 00
\r inserts a hex 0D (carriage return) character

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 195

Program Functions List 5000LC Programming

\n inserts a hex 0A (newline) character

\t inserts a hex 09 (tab) character

Port must be one of the following (not in quotation marks):

COM1 CPU card serial 1

COM2 CPU card serial 2
COM3 C2000 card serial port
COM4 modem card serial port
COM5 not currently used

Example:

SendSerialIn(COM1,"R,DGCLK\r")
; this command sends the current time of day string out com port 1
;(CPU card Serial 1)

SetLEDOn(switch) Turns the LED of the specified switch to “on.”

SetLEDOff(switch) Turns the LED of the specified switch to “off.”

StartRamp(group) Starts ramping the specified load group in the opposite direction of the
previous ramp (knows the last ramp direction).

StopRamp(group) Stops ramping the specified load group. This is typically programmed to
switch release.

OpenLoads(group) (Used with two-way motor loads.) Energizes the loads in a group and turns
off the complements (1 on, 2 off). (Assuming the load in the group is the
first output of a module.)

CloseLoads(group) (Used with two-way motor loads.) Turns off the loads in the group and
turns on the complements (1 off, 2 on). (Assuming the load in the group is
the first output of a module.)

StopLoads(group) (Used with two-way motor loads.) Turns off the loads in the group and
turns off the complements.

PressSwitch(switch) Causes a “switch press” event to be launched.

HoldSwitch(switch) Causes a “switch hold” event to be launched.

ReleaseSwitch(switch) Causes a “switch release” event to be launched.

ToggleLoadsOn(group) Performs same action as the Toggle (On) function. Refer to “Toggle (On),
Toggle (Off) (5000LC)” on page 127 for more information.

196 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Programming Program Functions List

ToggleLoadsOff(group) Performs same action as the Toggle (Off) function. Refer to “Toggle (On),
Toggle (Off) (5000LC)” on page 127 for more information.

LockLoads(group) Locks all loads in the specified load group to their present state. While
locked they are inaccessible. They are unlocked using the “UnlockLoads”
function. This program function is commonly used for parties.

UnlockLoads(group) Unlocks all loads in the specified load group. Loads are locked with the
“LockLoads” function.

LockSwitch(switch) Locks the specified switch to its present state. While locked it is inaccessi-
ble. It is unlocked using the “UnlockSwitch” function.

UnlockSwitch(switch) Unlocks the specified switch. Once unlocked it functions normally. It is

locked using the “LockSwitch” function.

LockTimer(timer) Locks the specified timer to prevent it from executing. While locked the
timer can neither turn off nor turn on its load group(s). It is unlocked using
the “UnlockTimer” function. This program function is commonly used for
parties.

UnlockTimer(timer) Unlocks the specified timer. The timer will activate at its next scheduled
start time. It is locked using the “LockTimer” function. Note: Unlocking a
timer does not cause it to start if it’s start time has already passed.

The following example shows a user program activated at the start of a

party:

SetLoadLevels(groupID2); turns on driveway lights

lockloads(groupID1)
;this makes certain the lights remain at their current settings
locktimer(timerID)
;this makes certain that driveway lights remain on until the
;party is over

At the end of a party:

unlockloads(groupID1)
unlocktimer(timerID)
SetLoadsOff(groupID2)
;the last line turns off the group that was controlled by the timer

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 197

Arithmetic Operators and Commands 5000LC Programming

Arithmetic Operators and Commands

This section lists the arithmetic operators and commands that are used in
the LiteWare3.x programming language. “x” represents a value (0, 1, etc.)
or an identifier (load, switch, etc.).

enter(x) Enters the indicated value on the stack.

add Adds the top two numbers on the stack together and replaces them with
the result.

sub Subtracts the last entry on the stack from the previous one and replaces
both numbers with the result.

mul Multiplies the top two values on the stack and replaces both with the
result.

div Divides the previous value on the stack by the last entry and replaces both
with the result.

mod (Modulus) When a number is divided and there is a remainder, this com-
mand places the remainder, rather than the division result, on the stack.
For example:

enter(22)
enter(5)
mod
;returns the remainder of “2” to the stack

equal True if the top two values on the stack are equal.

nequal True if the top two values on the stack are not equal.

gtr True if the top value on the stack is greater than the second value.

lsr True if the top value on the stack is less than the second value.

gtreq True if the top value on the stack is greater than or equal to the second
value.

lsreq True if the top value on the stack is less than or equal to the second value.

setstate(x) Sets the state variable to the value x.

198 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Programming Arithmetic Operators and Commands

wait(x) Instructs the program to wait for the value entered in tenths of a second
(e.g., 100 = 10 seconds)

end Causes the interpreter to stop without terminating the program.

term Terminates the interpreter, closing the program.

pause(event,ID) Pauses the interpreter running the specified event. The “resume” com-
mand is used to start the interpreter again. The event parameter can be rep-
resented by any of the following:

ini = startup event

swp = switch press
swh = switch hold
swr = switch release
tmb = timer begin
tme = timer end
usr = user event

The ID parameter can represent a switch, timer, or user identifier entered

as a decimal value.

resume(event,ID) Resumes a paused interpreter running the specified event. The “pause”
command is used to temporarily stop the interpreter. The event parameter
can be represented by any of the following:

ini = startup event

swp = switch press
swh = switch hold
swr = switch release
tmb = timer begin
tme = timer end
usr = user event

The ID parameter can represent a switch, timer, or user identifier entered

as a decimal value.

getglobal(ID) Retrieves the value from a global variable, where ID is the identifier of the
global variable. A global variable is created or updated using the “setglo-
bal(ID,val)” command (see below). A global variable can be queried by
any program on the CCU and will give the value that was saved to it using
the “setglobal(ID,val)” command. The value is placed on the stack.

setglobal(ID,val) Creates or updates a global variable. A global variable can be queried by

any program on the CCU and will give the value that was saved to it using
this command. The “setglobal” command saves the value (val) as the

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 199

Arithmetic Operators and Commands 5000LC Programming

value for the specified global variable. The ID must be between 0 and
1000.

gettime Retrieves the current time using the format HHMM (24-hour format). For
example, 700 = 7:00 a.m.; 1400 = 2:00 p.m.

getdate Retrieves the current date using the format MMDD.

getwday Retrieves the current day of the week (1 – 7, where 1 is Sunday).

getmday Retrieves the current day of the month.

getset Retrieves the sunset time for the current day using the format HHMM (24-
hour format). For example, 2015 = 8:15 p.m.

getrise Retrieves the sunrise time for the current day using the format HHMM
(24-hour format). For example, 655 = 6:55 a.m.

200 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 5000LC Macros 13
This chapter provides information and instructions for creating and load-
ing macros in a 5000LC user program. Macros are programming “short-
cuts.” A macro is a file containing a pre-defined program that you load
into the user program dialog box while programming a User function, user
event, or startup event (refer to Chapter 12, “5000LC Programming”). You
then specify the parameters for your design. Because it is a separate file, a
macro can easily be transferred between computers.

Use the “Get Macro” option to import a macro with parameters unique to
each design to your User function, user event, or startup event programs.
This means that one macro can be utilized in several designs. You can cre-
ate your own macros for use in your designs.

Import a Macro
You should save or copy macro files to the LiteWare 3.6 default folder on
your hard disk so they will be easy to find.

Each macro has a specific purpose and is designed to function with a spe-
cific type of event. A “ProgramType” statement in the macro's header
identifies the intended type of event as follows:

@ProgramType[startup] (startup event)

@ProgramType[user] (user event)
@ProgramType[switch] (user program specifying a switch)
@ProgramType[timer] (user program specifying a timer)

Do the following to import a macro file into LiteWare 3.6:

1. From the dialog box for the User function (“Edit a Switch,” “User
(5000LC)” on page 129 or “Add a Timer,” “User” on page 156), user
event (refer to “Edit a Switch,” “Combination (5000LC)” on
page 110), or startup event (refer to “Startup Event” on page 46), click
the [Get Macro] button.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 201

Import a Macro 5000LC Macros

The following dialog box is displayed.

The default folder opens, and all macro files (files with an “.mcr”
extension by default) are listed. If your macro files are located in a dif-
ferent folder, click to select the folder.

2. Select the macro file that you want to load, and click [Open], or dou-
ble-click the macro file name. The following dialog box is displayed.

202 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Macros Create a Macro

3. To customize the macro for the job, select a parameter in the box on
the left. On the right, a corresponding field with a drop-down list
becomes available.

4. Select whether you want the load groups, loads, keypads, switches, or
timers in the drop-down list sorted by “Name” or “ID/Address.”

5. Click at the appropriate field, and select a setting for the parameter.

6. If the “Value” field becomes available, enter the applicable informa-

tion. For example, if you selected a timer macro parameter, enter the
timer length in tenths of a second.

7. Click [OK] to exit the Macro Parameters dialog box and return to the
user program dialog box. The macro is loaded into the Program box.

Activate a A switch's LED does not automatically light in response to the actions in
the macro program. Nor is it required that it light in order for the macro to
Switch's LED work properly. For a switch's LED to light in response to program actions,
one of the following is required:

• The correct LED statements must be included in the program (explicit

“SetLEDOn” and “SetLEDOff” functions), or ...
• The specified load group for the macro must be assigned to the switch
being used to run the program. You can do this by assigning the load
group to the switch (refer to “Edit a Switch” on page 107 or “Load and
Programming Summary” on page 139). The LED update must be set up
correctly (e.g., “@LEDUpdate[allon]” for a switch macro); refer to
“LEDUpdate” on page 208.

Create a Macro
Macros are programming “shortcuts.” A macro is a file containing a pre-
defined program that you load into the user program dialog box while pro-
gramming a User function, user event, or startup event (refer to Chapter
12, “5000LC Programming”). You specify the macro parameters for your
design. Because it is a separate file, a macro can be transferred between
computers.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 203

Create a Macro 5000LC Macros

You can create your own macros. Parameters unique to each design are
added to the macro when you import it into LiteWare (refer to “Import a
Macro” on page 201), so one macro can be utilized in several designs.

You create macros in any word processing program in which you can save
a file in the ASCII “text only” format. Programs such as Microsoft Note-
pad or Wordpad work well. These programs save the macro in the correct
format, but they add a .txt extension to your file (unless the file type is
“*.*”). After the file is completed, edit the file name so that it has the cor-
rect “.mcr” extension (e.g., macro.mcr).

NOTE ☞ Do not save macros in a standard word processor format (e.g., Word Perfect’s
.wpd or Microsoft Word’s .doc). A macro must be in the ASCII text format to
work.

Control Tags A macro is a user program with added “control tags,” most of which are
placed in the macro's header. The program portion of the macro uses the
same syntax as other user programs. The header's control tags define the
program type, program parameters, and so on.

Control Tag Syntax Each control tag statement is preceded by the “at” symbol (@), as follows:

@ProgramType[switch]

Comments may be added to either the user program or the header. How-
ever, comments before the first event control tag do not transfer to the Pro-
gram box; comments in the user program are transferred. Comments must
be preceded by a semicolon (;), as follows:

;this is a comment

Syntax specific to each control tag is explained in the following sections

describing each type of control tag.

Control Tag Types Control tags serve two main purposes:

• They allow you to set program options (such as program type and
event, Reentrant, and LEDUpdate) that are normally set using the fields
in the user program dialog box.
• They allow you to add program parameters, which prompt the user to
enter values required to complete the program.

204 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Macros Create a Macro

LiteWare 3.6 macros use five types of control tags, as follows:

• ProgramType
• DefineParam
• Reentrant
• LEDUpdate
• Event

Header control tags are explained in the following sections.

ProgramType The “ProgramType” control tag (required) defines the type of event with
which the macro is designed to work. It is the equivalent of selecting
“Startup Event,” “User Event,” or “User Function” when creating a pro-
gram. Possible program types are:

@ProgramType[startup] (Startup event)

@ProgramType[user] (User event)
@ProgramType[switch] (User function specifying a switch)
@ProgramType[timer] (User function specifying a timer)

The ProgramType tag must be the first line in the header (unless it is
preceded by comment lines).

DefineParam “DefineParam” control tags are used to prompt a user to enter the applica-
ble design parameters for the program when the macro is loaded. These
are the parameters selected in the Macro Parameters dialog box (refer to
“Import a Macro” on page 201).

When a user starts a macro, a dialog box is displayed that requests the
parameters defined by the DefineParam control tags in the macro header.
After the parameters are selected or entered, and the user clicks [OK] in the
dialog box, the program information from the macro and the specified
parameters are combined and the complete program is displayed in the
Program box of the user program dialog box.

NOTE ☞ DefineParam tags are always placed together as a group in the header of the
macro. To avoid confusion, you should avoid placing comments between
DefineParam tags.

A DefineParam tag consists of a name, a type, and a default, as shown

below (a default is required but can be “0”):

@DefineParam[name,type,default]

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 205

Create a Macro 5000LC Macros

Commas (but no spaces) separate the name, type, and default values.

You must add a DefineParam statement for each parameter the user is
required to enter. Up to 99 parameters may be defined for each macro.

Name The name in the DefineParam tag is the description that will be displayed
in the dialog box. The name should be as descriptive as possible in order
to help the user understand the purpose of the parameter they are to enter.
Up to 30 characters may be used. You can use spaces in the name but
nowhere else in the control tag. For example:

@DefineParam[Motor Loads Group,type,default]

Type The DefineParam tag must specify the type of information being
requested, as follows (all are selected by name except the value):

group (load group)

load (specific module load)
keypad (specific keypad gang)
switch (specific button/switch on the keypad)
timer (specific named timer)
value (requested numeric value)

This entry specifies the type of field in the dialog box for the program
parameter. For example, if “group” is specified as the type, the Macro
Parameters dialog box provides a drop-down list of load group choices for
the user. All parameter types except “value” provide the user with a drop-
down list.

If “value” is specified, a data entry field is provided for the user to enter
the numeric value requested. The “name” entry should describe the type of
entry required. Most value requests call for a time entry, always defined in
tenths of a second. For example, “Duration of timer (1/10 sec)” tells the
user to enter a time value in tenths of a second.

Default You must enter a default parameter. If the user does not make a selection
or enter a value, the default is used. A default is particularly useful when
the “value” type is specified. If necessary, “0” can be specified as a
default. If “0” is specified as the default for a load group, the default is the
top entry in the drop-down list. If “15,” is specified, the default is load
group ID 15 from the drop-down list.

206 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Macros Create a Macro

Insert the Parameters After the parameters requested by the DefineParam control tag are
into the Program entered, the macro must specify where in the program to insert the infor-
mation. This requires some cross-referencing between the DefineParam
control tag and the program.

All DefineParam control tags are placed together as a group in the macro's
header. Though they are not directly numbered, a sequential numbering is
implied by their order in the header. The first parameter is identified as 1,
the second parameter is 2, the third is 3, and so on. If you add a
DefineParam control tag to, or delete one from, a group of DefineParam
tags, keep the implied sequential numbers in mind, as they are used to
identify the position of the parameters in the program.

To identify where the requested parameters are to be placed in the pro-

gram, enter a variable reference to each parameter as identified by the
DefineParam tag’s position in the header.

For example:

@DefineParam[Dimming Switch,switch,0]
@DefineParam[Dimming Group,group,0]
.
.
.
GetLEDState(###1)
SetLoadsOn(###2)

When the macro is loaded, the first parameter (the dimming switch num-
ber) is inserted in place of the variable “###1;” the second parameter (the
dimming group number) is inserted in place of the variable “###2,” and so
on. The parameters (###2, ###1, etc.) may appear in multiple lines.

Up to 99 parameters can be defined in a macro. The proper syntax for a

variable is: (###1) . . . (###9), (##10) . . . (##99).

Reentrant The “Reentrant” control tag is used to enable or disable the “Reentrant”
option. This tag performs the same function as the Reentrant check box in
the user program dialog box (refer to “Reentrant” on page 188). Enter the
following in the macro to enable the function:

@Reentrant[1]

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 207

Create a Macro 5000LC Macros

If the Reentrant control tag is not present or is set to zero, Reentrant is dis-
abled. A Reentrant (and LEDUpdate if both are used) control tag is nor-
mally the last line but may be placed anywhere in the macro.

LEDUpdate You can use the “LEDUpdate” control tag to determine the state of a
switch's LED. Enter an LEDUpdate control tag using the following for-
mat:
@LEDUpdate[type]

Any of the following types may be defined:

none
allon (all on)
alloff (all off)
anyon (any on)
anyoff (any off)
preset (on at preset)
notpreset (loads not at preset)

For example, to turn the LED on if any loads are on, enter:

@LEDUpdate[anyon]

NOTE ☞ A load group must be assigned to the switch for the LEDUpdate control tag to
have the desired effect. Using LEDUpdate with no group associated with the
switch may cause the LED to be “on” continuously.

An LEDUpdate (and Reentrant if both are used) control tag is normally

the last line but may be placed anywhere in the macro.

Event An “Event” control tag identifies the type of event or action, beginning
with the next program line and continuing either to the end of the program
or to the next Event control tag. All macros must have at least one Event
control tag. Use the following format to enter an Event control tag:

@Event[type]

The type of action must be consistent with the program type in order for it
to run. Any of the following actions can be entered in the place of type:

ini (startup event)

swp (switch press)
swh (switch hold)

208 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Macros Create a Macro

swr (switch release)

tmb (timer begin)
tme (timer end)
usr (user event)

An Event tag can be placed at any location in the program, and multiple
tags may be used, but each event type can only appear once in a macro.
For example, Event tags are commonly used to define switch press, switch
hold, and switch release functions in a program.

Remember that an Event control tag immediately affects all program state-
ments that follow it, either to the end of the program or until another Event
control tag is read.

Macro Examples The following examples illustrate how macros are written.

Dimmer @ProgramType[switch]
@DefineParam[Dimming Switch,switch,0]
@DefineParam[Dimming Group,group,0]
;Switch press event:
@Event[swp]
;The state variable is used to detect a hold event:
setstate(0)
end
;Switch hold event:
@Event[swh]
;The following lines cause the loads to ramp if the switch is
;held.
setstate(1)
GetLEDState(###1)
If(stack=0)
{
SetLoadsOn(###2)
wait(15)
}
StartRamp(###2)
end
;Switch release event:
@Event[swr]

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 209

Create a Macro 5000LC Macros

;If ramping, stop the ramp, otherwise toggle the loads:

if(state=1)
{
StopRamp(###2)
term
}
ToggleLoadsOn(###2)
term
@LEDUpdate[allon]

Notice that all three events, switch press, switch hold, and switch release,
have been programmed into the macro using Event tags. A simpler version
of this program (a user program, not a macro) is shown in “Conditional
Statements” on page 184.

Timed (On) @ProgramType[switch]

@DefineParam[Timed Group,group,0]
;active time in tenths of seconds (e.g., 6000 is 10 minutes or
;600 sec.):
@DefineParam[Active Time (1/10 sec),value,6000]
@Event[swp]
;must be reentrant (set below)
SetLoadsOn(###1)
wait(###2)
SetLoadsOff(###1)
term
@LEDUpdate[allon]
@Reentrant[1]

This macro only needs the load group parameter for the timer to be estab-
lished, since a default time entry has been included. However, if the time
needs to be different from the default, the value will have to be changed.

In order for the LED update to work correctly, the load group must also be
assigned to the switch. Notice that only a switch press event is pro-
grammed and that the switch is set for Reentrant. The Reentrant function
causes the time to start over if the switch is pressed again.

Pathway Sequence @ProgramType[switch]

@DefineParam[First Load Group,group,0]
@DefineParam[Second Load Group,group,0]

210 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Macros Create a Macro

@DefineParam[Third Load Group,group,0]

@DefineParam[Delay to Turn On (1/10 sec),value,30]
@DefineParam[First Load Off Delay,value,3000]
@DefineParam[Second Load Off Delay,value,3000]
@DefineParam[Third Load Off Delay,value,3000]
@Event[swp]
;This macro sets a sequence of load groups to come on one
;at a time. It defaults to 3 seconds between each turn on and
;five minutes between each turn off.
SetLoadsOn(###1)
wait(###4)
SetLoadsOn(###2)
wait(###4)
SetLoadsOn(###3)
wait(###5)
SetLoadsOff(###1)
wait(###6)
SetLoadsOff(###2)
wait(###7)
SetLoadsOff(###3)
term

This macro requires load groups to be set up for each of the three steps.
They are noted in the parameter setup as the “First,” “Second,” and
“Third” load groups. There is no LED updating for the switch; therefore,
no group needs to be assigned to the switch. Because the switch is not
Reentrant, if pressed again, the program is duplicated.

Scene Dimmer @ProgramType[switch]

@DefineParam[Scene Switch,switch,0]
@DefineParam[Scene Group,group,0]
@Event[swp]
setstate(0)
end
@Event[swh]
setstate(1)
GetLEDState(###1)
if(stack=0)
{
SetLoadLevels(###2)

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 211

Create a Macro 5000LC Macros

wait(15)
}
StartRamp(###2)
end
@Event[swr]
if(state=1)
{
StopRamp(###2)
term
}
GetLEDState(###1)
if(stack=0)
{
SetLoadLevels(###2)
term
}
SetLoadsOff
term

In this program, if the loads are off, they fade to the preset levels when the
switch is pressed and released. If the switch is held, they ramp as though
assigned to a dimmer. When pressed and released again, they fade off.
When turned back on, they return to the preset level using the fade-on
times.

Three-Speed Fan @ProgramType[switch]

Control Using @DefineParam[Fan Low Output,load,0]
@DefineParam[Fan Medium Output,load,0]
Hunter Speed @DefineParam[Fan High Output,load,0]
Controller @DefineParam[Low Setting Group,group,0]
@DefineParam[Medium Setting Group,group,0]
@DefineParam[High Setting Group,group,0]
@DefineParam[All Fans Off,group,0]
@Event[swp]
GetLoadState(###1)
;If at low, turn off.
if(stack=1)
{
SetLoadsOff(###7)
term

212 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

5000LC Macros Create a Macro

}
GetLoadState(###2)
;If at medium, turn to low.
if(stack=1)
{
SetLoadsOff(###5)
SetLoadsOn(###4)
term
}
GetLoadState(###3)
;If at high, go to medium.
if(stack=1)
{
SetLoadsOff(###6)
SetLoadsOn(###5)
term
}
;Otherwise, set to high.
SetLoadsOn(###6)
term
@LEDUpdate[anyon]

In this program, the load groups only contain the outputs needed for the
specified speed and no others. For instance, the low group sets the low
output at 100%. The medium group sets the medium and low outputs at
100%. The high group sets the high output at 100%. The “All Fans Off”
group has all three outputs, but the levels aren't considered, because the
group is only used to perform an “off.”

The “All Fans Off” group contains all three outputs and must be assigned
to the switch to ensure that the LEDs function correctly. When done cor-
rectly, the LED is on whenever any of the outputs are on (i.e., if the fan is
on, the LED is on).

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 213

Create a Macro 5000LC Macros

Notes

214 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

 Import/Export 14

The following import and export functions are available in LiteWare 3.6:

• Import Billing (import a billing file exported from third-party software)

• Import Fixtures (import a fixture list exported from another project

database file)

• Import LWJ File (import an .lwj database file from LiteWare 2.xx)
• Import 5000LC Program File (import a program file that was down-
loaded from a 5000LC CCU)

• Import Standard Program File (import a .def file for a Standard CCU)

• Import Compact Program File (import a .cdf file for a Compact CCU)

• Import LW3.0 MDB (import an .mdb database file from LiteWare3.0 -

3.07)

• Export Billing (create a billing file to import into third-party software)

• Export Fixtures (create a fixture list to import into another project data-
base file)

• Export Program File (5000LC, Standard, or Compact, depending on the

CCU selected in Job Parameters)

• Export MCS File (create an MCS file to upload to the master keypad)

• To/From CCU (upload files to and download files from the CCU; set
the 5000LC or Compact CCU clock; perform diagnostics on the
5000LC and Compact CCUs)

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 215

Import Options Import/Export

Import Options

Import Billing You can import billing information from your company’s software or
spreadsheet program into LiteWare 3.6. The file must be in a comma-
delimited text format (.txt). The Projects folder is the default folder for all
files to be imported.

NOTE ☞ Billing information imported into LiteWare 3.6 is added to the end of any exist-
ing billing information. If you want it to replace existing billing information,
delete the existing information before you start the import.

To import billing information into the currently loaded job, do the follow-
ing.

1. Select Import from the File menu and Import Billing from the submenu.
The following dialog box is displayed.

The Projects folder is opened, and all billing files (files with a .txt
extension) in the folder are listed. If your billing files are located in a
different folder, click and select the folder.

2. Click the file that you want to import, then click [Open] to start the
import.

3. An Import Results prompt is displayed showing import detail and any

errors that occurred during the import. Click [OK] to close the prompt.

216 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export Import Options

Import Fixtures You can import a fixtures list from another project database file. First, you
must export the list from the other project database file (refer to “Export
Fixtures” on page 225), then open the database to which you want to
import the list, and import the fixtures file that was created during the
export.

A fixtures file has a “.fix” extension and is saved to the Projects folder by
default.

1. Open the project database file that is to receive the fixtures list.

2. Select Import from the File menu and Import Fixtures from the sub-
menu. The following dialog box is displayed.

The Projects folder is opened, and all fixtures files (files with a “.fix”
extension) in the folder are listed. If your files are located in a different
folder, click and select the folder.

3. Click the file that you want to import, then click [Open] to start the
import.

4. An Import Results prompt is displayed showing import detail and any

errors that occurred during the import. Click [OK] to close the prompt.

Import LWJ Use this function to import job files from Liteware 2.xx into LiteWare 3.6.
Most items, including custom keypads, are imported. However, items such
File as custom or data input keypads may not be editable in LiteWare 3.6. Elite
CCU functions are converted to 5000LC functions.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 217

Import Options Import/Export

The imported .lwj file is added to the current database file as a new job.

You can also convert and load an .lwj file into LiteWare 3.6 using the Open
function. If you use Open to load an .lwj file, a new project database is cre-
ated with only the job from the original database. The original .lwj file is
retained. Refer to “Import LiteWare 2.xx Job File (*.lwj)” on page 35 for
more information.

The Projects folder is the default folder for all files to be imported.

To import a 2.xx job file, do the following.

1. Load the project database that is to receive the file.

2. Select Import from the File menu and Import LWJ File from the sub-
menu. The following dialog box is displayed.

The Projects folder is opened, and all LiteWare 2.XX job files (files
with an .lwj extension) in the folder are listed. If your files are located
in a different folder, click and select the folder.

3. Click the file that you want to import, then click [Open] to start the
import.

4. An Import Results box is displayed showing import detail and any

errors that occurred during the import. Click [OK] to close the prompt.

The .lwj file is imported into the open database as a new job with the
same name as the original .lwj file.

218 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export Import Options

Import You can download a program file from the 5000LC CCU and then import
it into LiteWare 3.6. Download the file using the “To/From CCU” option
5000LC (refer to “Download a Program File from the CCU” on page 234), and
then use the “Import 5000LC Program File” option to import the program
Program File file into LiteWare 3.6. The imported program file is added to the current
database as a new job.

NOTE ☞ In order to see the design information in a program file created in LiteWare
3.6, you must open the program file rather than importing it. (Program files
that were created in an earlier version of LiteWare do not contain design infor-
mation.)

1. Load the project database that is to receive the file.

2. Select Import from the File menu and Import 5000LC Program File
from the submenu, and the following dialog box is displayed.

The Projects folder is opened, and all program files (files with a .prg
extension) in the folder are listed. If your files are located in a different
folder, click and select the folder.

3. Click the file that you want to import, then click [Open] to start the
import.

A new job with a default name (e.g., job3) is added to the open data-
base, and the program file is imported into the new job.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 219

Import Options Import/Export

If any problems occurred during the import, warning messages, such

as the following, are displayed.

4. Make note of the information in all warning messages and manually

update the specified items.

5. Refer to “Program File Import Limitations” on page 222 for informa-

tion about limitations in the way the program file is converted to an
active LiteWare 3.6 job.

Import You can import a program file compiled for a Standard or Compact CCU
into LiteWare 3.6. The program definitions can be taken from the program
Standard or file (.def or .cdf), also called a definition file, or collectively from the other
files associated with the job. All files related to the job must reside in the
Compact same folder. LiteWare will attempt to read all of the files, but only the def-
inition file (.def or .cdf) is required. The data is imported into the currently
Program File opened project database file as a new job.

To import a Standard or Compact definition file, do the following:

1. Load the project database that is to receive the file.

2. Select Import from the File menu and either Import Standard Program
File or Import Compact Program File from the submenu.

220 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export Import Options

The Import Program File dialog box for either the Standard or Com-
pact files is displayed.

3. The Projects folder is opened, and all definition files (files with a .def
or .cdf extension) in the folder are listed. If your files are located in a
different folder, click and select the folder.

4. Click the file that you want to import, then click [Open] to start the
import.

When you import a Standard/Compact program file, LiteWare looks

for and attempts to read all of the files related to the job. If the date and
time on the .def or .cdf file is earlier than the .swp file, the .def or .cdf
file is ignored.

5. Warning messages may be displayed during the conversion. Make note

of the information in all warning messages and manually update the
specified items.

6. An Import Results box is displayed showing import detail and any

errors that occurred during the import. If necessary, you can copy and
paste the contents of the Import Results box into Notepad and save it.
Click [OK] to close the box.

A new job with a default name (e.g., job3) is added to the open data-
base, and the program file is imported into the new job.

7. Refer to “Program File Import Limitations” below for information

about limitations in the way the program file is converted to an active
LiteWare 3.6 job.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 221

Import Options Import/Export

Program File An imported program file does not include information on locations,
enclosure types, or module types.
Import
Because a program file does not use locations, LiteWare 3.6 imports all
Limitations loads to the “All” location. To establish locations, you must create new
locations in the Parameters view and move the imported loads to their
applicable locations in the Loads view. However, this is only necessary if
you plan to use LiteWare 3.6’s auto-assignment feature to add enclosures
and modules and to reassign loads.

Because a program file does not identify modules, all modules in the
imported job are classified as “Unknown Modules.” All enclosures are
classified as 4-module enclosures, and modules are placed in the enclo-
sures in the order they are created.

The program identifies loads but does not identify the wattage used by
loads. For this reason, the loads imported with a program file are classified
as “zero watt loads.” The missing data must either be manually added to
the loads list or the loads must be manually assigned (see “Add a Module
or Power Supply” on page 84 for information on manually adding loads).

If you are recreating a job in LiteWare 3.6 that has already been installed
at a residence, you can manually select each module type using the infor-
mation from the original enclosure schedule. Refer to “Edit a Module” on
page 88 for information on selecting modules.

If you are using this information as the starting point for a new design job,
you can delete the imported enclosures/modules and reassign them using
LiteWare 3.6’s auto-assignment feature after you have moved the loads to
their correct locations.

In LiteWare 3.6, keypads, enclosures, and timers are listed in alphabetical

order.

Import LW3.0 Use this function to import a project database file created in a previous
version of LiteWare3.0 (3.0 - 3.07) into LiteWare 3.6. The .mdb file is con-
MDB verted to a new database file with an .lwd extension. The original .mdb file
is retained unchanged so you can load it into an earlier version of Lite-
Ware or use it as a backup that will load into either version of LiteWare.

You can also convert and load an .mdb file into LiteWare 3.6 using the
Open function. Refer to “Import LiteWare 3.0-3.07 Database File
(*.mdb)” on page 35 for more information.

222 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export Import Options

The Projects folder is the default folder for all files to be imported.

NOTE ☞ You do not have to open a project to import an .mdb file. If a project database
is open when you import the file, the open database is closed and the converted
file becomes the open project database.

To import an .mdb database file, do the following.

1. Select Import from the File menu and Import LW3.0 MDB from the
submenu. The following dialog box is displayed.

The Projects folder is opened, and all LiteWare3.0 – 3.07 job files
(files with an .mdb extension) in the folder are listed. If your files are
located in a different folder, click and select the folder.

2. Click the file that you want to import, then click [Open] to start the
import. The following message is displayed.

3. Click [OK]. The .mdb file is converted to a new database file with an
.lwd extension and opened. The original .mdb file is retained
unchanged so you can load it into an earlier version of LiteWare or use
it as a backup that will load into either version.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 223

Export Options Import/Export

Export Options

Export Billing You can export billing information to a comma-delimited text file, which
can be imported into a third-party application such as a spreadsheet pro-
gram or your company’s software.

NOTE ☞ Exported billing files are LiteWare 3.x compatible by default. If you want to
import the billing file into LiteWare 2.xx, click Billing Preferences in the Billing
view, and enable the Export option, “LW2XX Compatible.”

To create a billing export file for the currently loaded job, do the follow-
ing.

1. Select Export from the File menu and Export Billing from the submenu.
The following dialog box is displayed.

2. Type the name that you want to give the exported billing file in the
“File name” text box and click [Save]. A .txt extension is added to the
file if you do not type it. The file is saved to the Projects folder.

3. An Export Results prompt is displayed showing export detail and any

errors that occurred. Click [OK] to close the prompt.

224 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export Export Options

Export Fixtures You can export a fixtures list from a project database file into a fixtures
file that can then be imported into a different project database file. The
export file is given a “.fix” extension and saved to the Projects folder.

Refer to “Import Fixtures” on page 217 for information on importing the

fixtures list into a different project database.

1. Load the project database file from which you want to export fixture
information, and select Export from the File menu and Export Fixtures
from the submenu. The following dialog box is displayed.

2. Type the name that you want to give the exported fixtures file in the
“File name” box and click [Save]. A “.fix” extension is added to the file
if you do not type it. The file is saved to the Projects folder.

3. An Export Results prompt is displayed showing export detail and any

errors that occurred. Click [OK] to close the prompt.

Export When you are ready to upload a job’s programming code to the LiteTouch
CCU, you must first convert it to a “program file” format. Use this func-
Program File tion to create the program file. To upload the program file to the CCU, use
the “To/From CCU” option (see “Upload a Program File to the CCU” on
page 232). LiteWare 3.6 produces a program file for the type of CCU that
you have specified for the job.

1. Open the job for which you want to create the program file.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 225

Export Options Import/Export

2. Select Export from the File menu and Export Program File from the sub-
menu. The dialog box shown below is for a 5000LC CCU.

The Projects folder is opened, and any existing program files are
listed, as follows:

• For the 5000LC, files with a .prg extension

• For the Standard CCU, files with a .def extension
• For the Compact CCU, files with a .cdf extension.
If your program files are located in a different folder, click to
select the folder.

3. Type the name that you want to give the program file in the “File
name” text box and click [Save]. The correct extension is added to the
file if you do not type it.

If you are copying over an existing file, click the file name to select it,
then click [Save].

4. An Export Results prompt is displayed showing export detail and any

errors that occurred. Click [OK] to close the prompt.

If you are creating a program file for a Standard or Compact CCU, the
following files are created:

• Main program (definition) file (.def for Standard or .cdf for Com-
pact)

226 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export Export Options

• DOS compatible, text files that contain the same information found
in the definition file (.swp, .nam, .tfp, .prm, .exl, .exs, and .ast)

5. When you are ready to upload the program file to the CCU, use the
“To/From CCU” option (see “Upload a Program File to the CCU” on
page 232).

Error Checking of Error checking and reporting are performed to ensure that blank instruc-
Program Files tion sets are not generated in the compiled file. Any switch press, timer
begin, or user program must have valid instructions.

If programming fails to compile, no programming for the switch or timer

is generated. For example, if a switch hold program has errors, the switch
press and release code is not compiled.

Unassigned loads are not exported to a program file. Warning messages

indicate which loads have been excluded and which, if any, load groups
have been affected.

Export MCS A master keypad or master control station (MCS) is programmed using a
control program uploaded to it via a serial port. When you are ready to
File upload the programming code to the master keypad, you must first convert
it to an “MCS file” format. Use this function to create the MCS file. After
you create the file, use the mcs.exe utility to upload the file to the master
keypad.

The master keypad accepts a maximum of 32 keypads (gangs). Make sure

the engraving information has been entered for all buttons as the master
keypad will look for it in the file. If any engraving information is missing,
a warning message will be displayed during the export.

Since the master keypad is operated by the user, keypad descriptions (not
keypad IDs) are used as the keypad names when the MCS file is created.

1. Open the job for which you want to create the MCS file.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 227

Export Options Import/Export

2. Select Export from the File menu and Export MCS File from the sub-
menu. The following dialog box is displayed.

The Projects folder is opened, and any existing MCS files (files with
an .mcs extension) are listed. If your MCS files are located in a differ-
ent folder, click to select the folder.

3. Type the name that you want to give the MCS file in the “File name”
text box and click [Save]. An .mcs extension is added to the file if you
do not type it. If you are copying over an existing file, click the file
name to select it, then click [Save].

228 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export Export Options

The following dialog box is displayed.

4. In the left-hand box, click the gangs or keypads that you want to
upload to the master keypad. To select several consecutive gangs, press
and hold <Shift>, then click the first and last gangs in the group you
want to select. To select several non-consecutive gangs, press and hold
<Ctrl>, then click each gang that you want to select. The number of
gangs you selected appears in the text box at the bottom of the win-
dow.

5. After you have selected the gangs to export, click [>] to move the
selected gangs to the right-hand box. Click [>>] to move all gangs
from the left-hand box to the right-hand box.

An MCS supports up to 32 gangs. If you select more than 32 gangs,

the message “NOTE: A Master Keypad can only support 32 gangs!”
appears under the right-hand box. To “deselect” or move gangs back to
the left-hand box, select the gang or gangs to move, and then click [<].
Click [<<] to move all gangs from the right-hand box to the left-hand
box.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 229

To/From CCU Import/Export

NOTE ☞ To provide for future products that may also use an MCS file format, LiteWare
3.6 allows you to create an MCS file with more than 32 gangs, but you cannot
upload a file with more than 32 gangs to the master keypad.

6. Click [OK] to create the MCS file. An Export Results prompt is dis-
played showing export detail and any errors that occurred. Take note
of the keypad for which any warnings occurred so that you can correct
the problem and create a new MCS file.

7. Click [OK] to close the Export Results prompt.

8. When you are ready to upload the file to the master keypad, use the
mcs.exe utility.

To/From CCU
Use the “To/From CCU” option to do the following:

• Set up communications with the CCU (below)

• Upload a program file to the CCU (page 232)

• Download a program file from the CCU (page 234)

• Set the CCU clock (page 235)

• Perform diagnostics on a 5000LC CCU (page 236)

• Perform diagnostics on a Compact CCU (page 244)

Set Up To set up communications between the computer and the CCU, do the fol-
lowing:
Communications
1. If a serial cable is not already connected to your computer, turn off the
computer, and connect the proper serial cable to the computer’s serial
port.

2. Connect the serial cable from the computer to the CPU card in the
CCU.

230 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export To/From CCU

3. Turn your computer back on, if necessary, and start LiteWare 3.6.

4. Select To/From CCU from the File menu, and the following dialog box
is displayed.

LiteWare 3.6 can communicate with a 5000LC, Standard, or Compact

CCU. You can upload program files to or download them from any of
these CCU types.

Job Selection This option is not available at this time. At present, you need to generate
and select a program file to upload to a CCU.

Central Controller The 5000LC is the default CCU. If you are using LiteWare 3.6 to commu-
Type nicate with a Standard or Compact CCU, click at this field and select
the CCU type. The selected CCU type appears on the buttons in this dialog

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 231

To/From CCU Import/Export

box and in the title bar of the communications dialog boxes. (5000LC is
shown in the screen images in this manual.)

Connection Type Transfers can be made by serial port or TCP/IP port, as follows:

Serial Port Settings If you selected Serial as the connection type, enter the following settings.

Serial Port If the serial port shown is not correct, click and select the serial port on
the computer to which you connected the serial cable.

Baud Rate If the displayed baud rate of the serial port is not correct, click and
select the correct rate.

TCP/IP Settings If you selected TCP/IP as the connection type, enter the following settings.

Address If the TCP/IP address shown is not correct, enter the correct TCP/IP
address to be used in the transfer.

Port If the TCP/IP port shown is not correct, enter the TCP/IP port to be used in
the transfer.

Refer to the next section, “Upload a Program File to the CCU” for infor-
mation on uploading the program file after you set up communications.

Upload a Do the following to upload a program file to the CCU:

Program File 1. Create a program file for the job you want to upload (refer to “Export
Program File” on page 225 for information).
to the CCU 2. Select To/From CCU from the File menu.

3. Set up communications with the CCU as described in “Set Up Com-

munications” on page 230.

232 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export To/From CCU

4. Click the [To 5000LC/Standard/Compact] button, and the following

dialog box is displayed.

The Projects folder is opened, and any existing program files are
listed, as follows:
• For the 5000LC, files with a .prg extension
• For the Standard CCU, files with a .def extension
• For the Compact CCU, files with a .cdf extension.
If your program files are located in a different folder, click to
select the folder.

5. Click the file that you want to upload and click [Open]. The dialog box
is closed, and the program file is uploaded to the CCU. The bar in the
Communication Properties dialog box (under the [To 5000LC/Stan-
dard/Compact] button) indicates the progress of the upload. Messages
relating to the upload are displayed in the Memo box.

NOTE ☞ When you upload a program file to the 5000LC CCU, the project database
information from the .lwd file is included in the program (.prg) file. When the
program file is downloaded from the CCU and opened in LiteWare, any changes
made to the program while it was in the CCU are automatically updated in the
LiteWare database file. If the combined program file and database information
is too large to upload, a message appears and only the program file is
uploaded. (The design information saved in the program file is not visible if the
program file is imported into LiteWare. You must open the .prg file to view the
design information.)

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 233

To/From CCU Import/Export

NOTE ☞ If there is a problem with communications, you can click [Abort Transfer] to
cancel the upload rather than waiting for the computer to time out.

Download a Do the following to download a program file from the CCU:

Program File 1. Select To/From CCU from the File menu.

from the CCU 2. Set up communications with the CCU as described in “Set Up Com-
munications” on page 230.

3. Click [From 5000LC/Standard/Compact] and the following dialog box

is displayed.

The Projects folder is opened, and any existing program files are
listed. If your program files are located in a different folder, click
to select the folder.

4. Type the name that you want to give the program file in the “File
name” text box. The correct extension is added to the file if you do not
type it.

5. Click [Save]. The dialog box is closed, and the program file is down-
loaded from the CCU. The colored bar in the Communication Proper-
ties dialog box (under the [From 5000LC/Standard/Compact] button)
indicates the progress of the download. Messages pertaining to the
download are displayed in the Memo box.

234 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export To/From CCU

NOTE ☞ When you upload a program file to the 5000LC CCU, the project database
information from the .lwd file is included in the program (.prg) file. When the
program file is downloaded from the CCU, any changes made to the program
while it was in the CCU are automatically updated in the LiteWare database
file. If the combined program file and database information is too large to
upload, a message appears and only the program file is uploaded. (The design
information saved in the program file is not visible if the program file is
imported into LiteWare. You must open the .prg file to view the design informa-
tion.)

NOTE ☞ If there is a problem with communications, you can click [Abort Transfer] to
cancel the download rather than wait for the computer to time out.

Set the CCU Use the functions shown below to set the clock on the CCU:

Clock

Get (CCU) Clock Click this button to retrieve the current date and time setting from the
5000LC or Compact CCU clock to determine if it needs to be reset. The
date and time are displayed below the buttons.

NOTE ☞ You cannot retrieve the date and time on a Standard CCU. However, the date
and time are shown on the front panel of the CCU’s display.

Computer Clock Click this button to get the current time and date from your computer’s
clock. The date and time are displayed below the buttons. The time does
not automatically update; it is updated each time you click [Computer
Clock]. You will want to get the current time just before setting the CCU
clock.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 235

To/From CCU Import/Export

To manually enter the date, in the date box, click and select the date
from the calender, as shown below:

To manually set the time, click the hour, minutes, seconds, or AM/PM.
The selected section is highlighted. Click the up and down selection
arrows to go forward or back one digit at a time, or change from AM to
PM and vice versa. The time does not automatically update. You will want
to set the current time just before setting the CCU clock.

Set (CCU) Clock With the current time shown in the boxes below the buttons, click [Set
(CCU) Clock] to send the date and time to the CCU’s clock. Because the
time is not automatically updated, you should click this button immedi-
ately after updating the time, or you can manually adjust the time to a few
seconds ahead.

NOTE ☞ If there is a problem with communications, you can click [Abort Transfer] to
cancel communications with the CCU rather than waiting for the computer to
time out.

5000LC CCU Use the functions on the 5000LC Diagnostics tab to perform control mod-
ule and keypad tests on the 5000LC CCU.
Diagnostics
1. Select To/From CCU from the File menu.

2. Set up communications with the 5000LC CCU as described in “Set Up

Communications” on page 230.

3. Click at the “Central Controller Type” field, and select 5000LC.

The 5000LC Diagnostics tab is enabled.

236 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export To/From CCU

4. Click the 5000LC Diagnostics tab, and the following screen is dis-
played.

Module Test Click [Module Test] to start the control module communications test. Enter
the number of loops that you want the test to run in the text box (from 1 to
1000). The more loops run, the more thorough the test. After the test has
started, the button changes to [Cancel Test], which you can click to stop the
test at any time (the test stops after the current loop is completed).

If the program file is open, test results for all modules specified in the pro-
gram file, as well as responses from any modules that are not in the pro-
gram file, are listed in the test results box (see “Test Results” on
page 238). Modules that do not respond are identified as “missing or phan-
tom,” and modules that respond but are not in the program file are identi-
fied as “not programmed.” If the program file is not open, only modules
that respond during the test are listed. Non-responding modules must be
identified by their absence.

Station Test Click [Station Test] to start the keypad test. Enter the number of loops that
you want the test to run in the text box (from 1 to 1000). The more loops
run, the more thorough the test. After the test has started, the button

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 237

To/From CCU Import/Export

changes to [Cancel Test], which you can click to stop the test at any time
(the test stops after the current loop is completed).

If the program file is open, test results for all keypads specified in the pro-
gram file, as well as responses from any keypads that are not in the pro-
gram file, are listed in the test results box (see “Test Results” below). Key-
pads that do not respond are identified as “missing or phantom,” and
keypads that respond but are not in the program file are identified as “not
programmed.” If the program file is not open, only keypads that respond
during the test are listed. Non-responding keypads must be identified by
their absence.

Full Loops Only The first loop of a keypad or module test is always a complete loop that
attempts communication with every address (00 through FF). If more than
one loop is specified for the test, subsequent loops will only check
addresses that responded during the first loop. If you want to attempt com-
munication with every address during every loop, select this option. This
can help to identify keypads or modules that are reporting inconsistently;
however, testing will take much more time if this option is selected.

Append Results Select this option if you want the current test results to be appended to the
end of the previous test results. You can only append test results from sim-
ilar tests (i.e., you can append results from multiple keypad tests, but you
cannot append keypad test results to module test results). This option does
not change how the test is conducted, only how the results are displayed.

Save Click [Save] to save the data displayed in the test results box to a text file.
A Save Test Results dialog box is displayed with the Projects folder
selected. If necessary, change to a different folder. Type the name that you
want to give the text file in the “File name” text box, and click [Save]. The
file is saved in a standard text file (.txt) format and can be opened in most
text editors.

Test Results Test results are displayed in the test results box of the Diagnostics tab in
the following columns:

Address This column lists the module or keypad addresses that responded to the
test. Addresses consist of two hexadecimal digits ranging from 00 to FF
and are physically set to each keypad and/or module with adjustable
addressing wheels. The addresses are listed in hexadecimal address order.
Addresses reporting more than once (on different ports) appear as multiple
entries in this column.

Port The CCU port (1 through 4) to which the module or keypad is assigned is
displayed in this column. Duplicate addresses (on different ports) are eas-

238 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export To/From CCU

ily recognized due to the order in which the addresses are listed and appear
as multiple entries on separate ports. Duplicate address responses on the
same port are listed in the “Duplicated” column.

Acknowledged The number in this column should increment by one with every test loop
completed for each keypad or module. If the keypad or module is commu-
nicating properly, the final number in this column will be equal to the
number of loops specified for the test. If the final result is less than the
number of loops run, this could indicate that the keypad or module is mal-
functioning. Errors are typically indicated in the “Bad Message” column.

Duplicated (only applies to keypad tests) This column lists any duplicate responses
from a keypad with the same address on the same port. Only duplicate
responses from keypads that are separated by a significant distance are
reported. Keypads with the same address that are close together are not
reported due to communication speeds.

Bad Message Incorrect responses from addressed keypads or modules are indicated in
this column. A bad message may result from inconsistent responses from a
keypad or module, which could be an indication of a potential failure. Typ-
ically, this results in a mixture of “acknowledged” and “bad message”
responses with neither equaling the number of loops run.

“False” bad messages may result from either of the following:

• Infrared (IR) keypads may respond with a bad message due to the lack
of the ninth LED.

• During a module test, if an address that is not physically present reports

a “bad message,” it may be caused by a 6-channel module at the previ-
ous address. 6-channel dimmer and relay modules respond with an
additional character causing the next address (if nonexistent) to appear
to have an invalid response.

Control Station Tab The Control Station tab contains a diagram of a nine-button keypad, which
you can use to simulate operation of any keypad in the LiteTouch system.
The keypad diagram consists of keypad buttons and LEDs, which you can
use to actually operate buttons on a keypad and receive feedback at the
computer.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 239

To/From CCU Import/Export

If the program file is open, in the Programmed Stations list, locate the key-
pad that you want to operate (use the scroll bar if necessary) and click it.
Its address is entered into the “Station Address” box. If the program file is
not open, enter the address of the keypad you want to test (00 to FF). Click
[Connect] to connect to the CCU, and the keypad’s simulated LEDs are
updated to reflect the current status of the keypad. The simulated keypad is
ready to operate (see “Keypad Simulation” below for additional informa-
tion).

The [Connect] button changes to [Disconnect] after you click it. Click [Dis-
connect] at any time to disconnect from the CCU and stop the simulation.

Keypad Simulation The diagram has nine buttons so that all keypad types are represented. If
the keypad you want to simulate has less than nine buttons, use only the
appropriate button positions (shown in the following tables) in your simu-
lation. For example, if you entered the keypad address for a six-button “S”
series keypad, use only buttons 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9 on the simulated nine-button
keypad to control the actual keypad.

240 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export To/From CCU

“S” Series Keypad

Number of Buttons Button Position
1 5
2 2, 8
3 2, 5, 8
4 1, 3, 7, 9
5 1, 3, 5, 7, 9
6 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9
7 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9
8 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9
9 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

“H” Series Keypad 1–5 Button

Number of Buttons Button Position
1 6
2 4, 6
3 2, 4, 6
4 2, 4, 6, 8
5 2, 4, 6, 8, 9

“H” Series Keypad 6–9 Button

Number of Buttons Button Position
6 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
7 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
8 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
9 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

“E” Series Keypad 1–4 Button (Single Gang)

Number of Buttons Button Position
1 1
2 1, 3
3 1, 2, 3
4 1, 2, 3, 4

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 241

To/From CCU Import/Export

“E” Series Keypad 5–8 Button (Dual Gang)

Number of Buttons Button Position
5 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
7 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
8 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

Click a button or click and hold the mouse button to initiate press, hold,
and release actions on any button. As you press and release, the LED
updates to show the button’s status.

LEDs do not automatically update on the simulated keypad if another

source affects the loads (e.g., a user activating a switch). To see the current
state of an LED on the screen, type the address and click [Connect] again.

Control Module Tab The Control Module tab allows you to test CCU-to-module communica-
tions. You specify a module to test and what you would like the module to
do with each of its assigned loads. You can then see the response that the
control module makes both on-screen and by checking the load directly.

242 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export To/From CCU

Module List If the program file is open, the modules are listed. Select the module you
want to test, and click [Connect] to connect to the CCU. The address is
inserted into the “Module Address” box.

Module Address If the program file is not open, enter the address of the module to be tested,
and click [Connect] to connect to the CCU.

The [Connect] button changes to [Disconnect] after you click it. Click [Dis-
connect] at any time to disconnect from the CCU and stop the test.

Load Settings This section is designed to be used with all types of standard line voltage
modules. A load level can be specified for dimmer modules. The level for
a relay module is always either 100 (full) or 0 (off).

Use
Select this option if you want to use the load included in the test.

Turn On
Select this option if you want the load to be turned on to the specified
level. If not selected, it is turned on at level 0.

Level
Enter the dim value for the load, with 100 being full and 0 being off.

Transition Time Specify in seconds the ramping time for the load to read the specified
level.

Command String to Send This is the command string that is sent to the 5000LC. It is shown for ref-
erence only and should not be changed.

Send String Click [Send String] to send the string in the “Command String to Send”
box to the specified module.

All messages generated as a result of the communication are displayed in

the message box.

Clear Memo Click [Clear Memo] to remove all messages from the message box.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 243

To/From CCU Import/Export

The following images show two control module tests and the resulting
messages.

Compact CCU Use the functions on the Compact Diagnostics tab to perform module and
keypad tests for the Compact CCU.
Diagnostics
1. Select To/From CCU from the File menu.

2. Set up communications with the Compact CCU as described in “Set

Up Communications” on page 230.

244 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export To/From CCU

3. Click at the “Central Controller Type” field, and select Compact

CCU. The Compact Diagnostics tab is enabled.

4. Click the Compact Diagnostics tab, and the following screen is dis-
played.

Abort After a test has started, you can click [Abort] to stop the test. The test stops
after the current operation is completed.

Clear Memo Click [Clear Memo] to remove all existing text from the test results box.

Save Results Click [Save Results] after the tests have been run to save the test results to a
file so you can view them later. A Save Memo dialog box is displayed with
the Projects folder selected. If necessary, change to a different folder. Type
the name that you want to give the text file in the “File name” text box, and
click [Save]. The file is saved in a standard text file (.txt) format and can be
opened in most text editors.

Station Test Click [Station Test] to start the keypad communications test. Test results
for all keypads found in the system are listed in the test results box. This
test runs through the following five stages:

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 245

To/From CCU Import/Export

1. Each keypad port is tested for basic integrity.

2. All LEDs on all keypads are turned off.
3. A response is requested from all keypads.
4. All LEDs on all keypads are turned on.
5. A response is requested from all keypads.

The LiteTouch system must be inactive (e.g., no switch presses, etc.) dur-
ing the test. If a switch is pressed during the test, no loads are activated and
an error is logged.

Ports Tested for The keypad communication test starts by testing the basic integrity of the
Basic Integrity keypad ports. The keypad port numbers correspond to the following con-
nector numbers indicated on the back of the CCU:

Port 1 - CSP1, Port 2 - CSP2

If a problem is detected, a message similar to the following is displayed:

Port 1 is Non-Functional

This message indicates one of two things: either the CCU is defective or
the keypad data line is being held low. To determine the cause of the prob-
lem, remove the connector from the non-functional port and run the test
again. If the error occurs again, the problem is in the CCU; if it does not,
the problem is in the keypad line. Normally, a broken or open power wire
causes this problem.

After all ports have passed the basic integrity test, the following message
is displayed:

Port 1 Okay Port 2 Okay

LEDs Turned Off After all ports have passed the basic integrity test, all keypad LEDs are
turned off. This is indicated by the following message:

Turning off all station LEDs. Current Address -> 00

The address increments quickly from 00 to FF. There are no error mes-
sages displayed during this time.

Response Requested from After all LEDs are turned off, a response is requested from all keypads, as
Keypads indicated by the following message:

Searching for stations. Current Address -> 00

The address again increments quickly from 00 to FF.

246 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export To/From CCU

There are two possible error messages that may appear at the end of the
“response requested” portion of the test, as follows:

Reporting out of order

This error normally indicates that someone has pressed a switch during
the test. It may also indicate that a keypad run is receiving an excessive
amount of interference and may need to have additional pull-up resis-
tors added to the data line. Pull-up resistors can be added at both the
CCU and at the end of a keypad run. (Contact LiteTouch for assistance
if you need to add pull-up resistors.)

Station reporting for the second time

A keypad reporting for the second time normally indicates that two
keypads have the same address. (They must be connected to different
ports on the CCU for the test to detect this problem.) This error must
be corrected for the system to properly update the keypad LEDs.

If this portion of the test runs without errors, a message similar to the fol-
lowing is displayed:

Found 13 Stations

LEDs Turned On After the keypad search is complete, all LEDs on all keypads are turned
on, as indicated by the following message:

Turning on all station LEDs. Current Address -> 00

The address increments quickly from 00 to FF.

Response Requested from After all the LEDs are turned on, a response is again requested from all
Keypads keypads, as indicated by the following message:

Searching for stations. Current Address -> 00

The address increments quickly from 00 to FF. During this part of the test,
there are three possible error messages:

Reporting out of order

(See above.)

Station reporting for the second time

(See above.)

Station not reporting with LEDs on.

This error message normally indicates one of two conditions:

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 247

To/From CCU Import/Export

• The keypad run has insufficient power and needs an additional

power supply
• The power and ground wires are not sufficient in size to carry the
required current.

If the output of the power supply is not falling below the minimum
value, use the spare wire provided in the LiteTouch keypad wiring to
double the ground. If this does not improve the response, you may
need to add an additional power supply to the center or end of a keypad
run.

When the final search is completed, all keypads found during the searches
are listed in address order.

Module Test Even when a LiteTouch system appears to operate correctly when buttons
are pressed, a module may still malfunction. The control module commu-
nication test helps to identify periodic or infrequent errors. Click [Module
Test] to start the control module communications test. Test results for all
modules found in the system are listed in the test results box.

The control module communication test runs up to 100 loops. During each
loop, a response is requested from all control modules in the system.
While the test is running, the following information is displayed:

Control Module Test Active

Clearing Module Test Array
Running Test Loop Number 1

The loop count increments from 1 to 100.

The test continues until loop 100 is reached or until you click [Abort] in the
Diagnostics tab. When you click [Abort], the test continues until the cur-
rent loop is finished.

The module address increments quickly from 00 to FF. When finished, the
test results are shown as follows:

Control Module Test Results

Module 01 responded every loop
Module 02 ERROR -> responded only 23 times in 100 loops
Module 03 IS ASSIGNED BUT IS NOT RESPONDING

All possible messages are shown in the above example.

248 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual

Import/Export To/From CCU

All modules that were found and all modules that are programmed but did
not report during at least one loop are listed.

If a module reported on every loop, the module is functioning properly. If

a module missed reporting on one or more loops, a problem exists. The
most common problem is a broken wire. Modules will often communicate
at least some of the time with a broken communication wire. If a module is
programmed but does not report, either the module is defective, there is an
error in its programming, it is not powered up, or it may have a phantom
load. All problems must be found and corrected to ensure proper system
operation.

After correcting any problems, run the module communication test again.
Continue to correct problems and test until all 100 loops test error free.

LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual 249

To/From CCU Import/Export

Notes

250 LiteWare 3.6 Design Manual